EC

Google Docs
Google Drive
Download [pdf]

File Info : application/pdf, 654 Pages, 17.36MB

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
B ENGINE

SECTION

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C

CONTENTS

INDEX FOR DTC ....................................................... 8 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction .............................. 71 F

Alphabetical Index ................................................... 8 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 74

DTC No. Index ...................................................... 12 Fail-safe Chart ....................................................... 76

PRECAUTIONS ....................................................... 16 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System

Basic Inspection .................................................... 77 G Symptom Matrix Chart ........................................... 82

(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-

Engine Control Component Parts Location ........... 86

SIONER" ............................................................... 16 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and

Circuit Diagram ...................................................... 92 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............ 96

A/T ......................................................................... 16 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .................... 96

Precaution ............................................................. 16 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ............... 19

CONSULT-II Function .......................................... 105 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ...................... 117 I

PREPARATION ........................................................ 20 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode

Special Service Tools ............................................ 20

. 119

Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 21 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................. 22 Mode .................................................................... 122

System Diagram .................................................... 22 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 125

Vacuum Hose Drawing .......................................... 23 System Chart ........................................................ 24

Description ........................................................... 125 K Testing Condition ................................................. 125

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 25 Inspection Procedure ........................................... 125

Electronic Ignition (EI) System .............................. 27 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 126

Air Conditioning Cut Control .................................. 28 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-

Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine

DENT ...................................................................... 129

Speed) ................................................................... 28 Description ........................................................... 129

CAN communication ............................................. 29 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 129 M

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................. 30 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .......... 130

Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check ................... 30 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 130

Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 133

Adjustment ............................................................ 31 Ground Inspection ............................................... 138

Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ..... 42 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 139

Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 42 Description ........................................................... 139

Idle Air Volume Learning ....................................... 42 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 139

Fuel Pressure Check ............................................. 44 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 139

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ........... 46 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 140

Introduction ........................................................... 46 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 141

Two Trip Detection Logic ....................................... 46 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ....................... 142

Emission-related Diagnostic Information ............... 47 Description ........................................................... 142

IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System -- NATS.).. 62 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) .......................... 62

. 142

OBD System Operation Chart ............................... 66 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 143

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ........................................... 71

EC-1

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 143 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 144 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER. 145 Description ........................................................... 145 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 145 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 145 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 146 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 147 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 150 Component Inspection ......................................... 152 Removal and Installation ..................................... 152 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER. 153 Description ........................................................... 153 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 153 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 153 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 154 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 155 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 158 Component Inspection ......................................... 160 Removal and Installation ..................................... 160 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR .................................... 161 Component Description ....................................... 161 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 161 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 161 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 162 Overall Function Check ....................................... 163 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 164 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 165 Component Inspection ......................................... 168 Removal and Installation ..................................... 168 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ........................ 169 Component Description ....................................... 169 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 169 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 169 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 170 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 171 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 172 Component Inspection ......................................... 175 Removal and Installation ..................................... 175 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR .......................... 176 Component Description ....................................... 176 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 176 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 176 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 178 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 179 Component Inspection ......................................... 180 Removal and Installation ..................................... 180 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ......................... 181 Component Description ....................................... 181 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 181 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 182 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 183 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 184 Component Inspection ......................................... 185 Removal and Installation ..................................... 185

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ...........................186 Component Description .......................................186 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .186 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................186 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................187 Wiring Diagram ....................................................188 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................189 Component Inspection .........................................192 Removal and Installation ......................................192
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR .....................................193 Component Description .......................................193 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................193 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................194 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................194 Component Inspection .........................................195 Removal and Installation ......................................195
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR .......................................196 Component Description .......................................196 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................196 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................196 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................197 Component Inspection .........................................198 Removal and Installation ......................................198
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................199 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................199 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................199 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................199 Component Inspection .........................................200 Removal and Installation ......................................200
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 ....................................201 Component Description .......................................201 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .201 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................201 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................202 Wiring Diagram ....................................................203 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................206 Component Inspection .........................................209 Removal and Installation ......................................210
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 .................................... 211 Component Description ....................................... 211 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 211 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 211 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................212 Overall Function Check ........................................213 Wiring Diagram ....................................................214 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................217 Component Inspection .........................................221 Removal and Installation ......................................223
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 ....................................224 Component Description .......................................224 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .224 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................224 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................225 Overall Function Check ........................................226 Wiring Diagram ....................................................227

EC-2

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 230 Component Inspection ........................................ 232 Removal and Installation ..................................... 233 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ................................... 234 Component Description ....................................... 234 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 234 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 234 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 235 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 236 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 239 Component Inspection ........................................ 241 Removal and Installation ..................................... 242 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ................................... 243 Component Description ....................................... 243 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 243 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 243 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 244 Overall Function Check ....................................... 244 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 246 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 249 Component Inspection ........................................ 252 Removal and Installation ..................................... 253 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION ............................................................. 254 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 254 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 254 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 256 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 258 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION ............................................................. 262 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 262 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 262 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 264 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 266 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ..................................... 270 Component Description ....................................... 270 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 270 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 270 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 272 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 273 Component Inspection ........................................ 274 Removal and Installation ..................................... 274 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ........................ 275 Component Description ....................................... 275 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 275 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 275 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 276 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 277 Component Inspection ........................................ 278 Removal and Installation ..................................... 278 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR .......................... 279 Component Description ....................................... 279 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 279 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 279 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 280 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 281

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 282

Component Inspection ......................................... 285 A

Removal and Installation ..................................... 285

DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS-

FIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE .................... 286 EC On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 286

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 286

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 287 DTC P0327, P0328 KS .......................................... 292 C

Component Description ....................................... 292

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 292

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 292 D

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 293

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 294

Component Inspection ......................................... 296 E Removal and Installation ..................................... 296

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ......................... 297

Component Description ....................................... 297

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 297

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 297

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 297 G

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 298

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 299

Component Inspection ......................................... 302 H Removal and Installation ..................................... 302

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ....... 303

Component Description ....................................... 303 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 303

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 303 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 303 J

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 304

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 307

Component Inspection ......................................... 310 K Removal and Installation ..................................... 310

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNC-

TION ....................................................................... 311 L On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 311

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 311

Overall Function Check ....................................... 312 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 313 M

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 316

System Description .............................................. 316

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 316

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 316

Overall Function Check ....................................... 317

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 318

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 321

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 321

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 322

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 323

Component Inspection ......................................... 329

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL-

UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..................... 330

Description ........................................................... 330

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 330

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 331

EC-3

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 331 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 332 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 334 Component Inspection ......................................... 335 Removal and Installation ..................................... 336 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE .................................................................... 337 Component Description ....................................... 337 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 337 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 337 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 338 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 339 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 340 Component Inspection ......................................... 342 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................. 344 Component Description ....................................... 344 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 344 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 344 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 345 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 345 Component Inspection ......................................... 346 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................. 347 Component Description ....................................... 347 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 347 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 347 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 348 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 349 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 350 Component Inspection ......................................... 352 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................. 353 Component Description ....................................... 353 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 353 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 353 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 354 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 355 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 356 Component Inspection ......................................... 360 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 361 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 361 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 362 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 363 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................ 369 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 369 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 370 Overall Function Check ....................................... 371 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 372 Component Inspection ......................................... 378 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ...................... 379 Component Description ....................................... 379 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 379 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 379

Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................380 Removal and Installation ......................................380 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......................381 Component Description .......................................381 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................381 Overall Function Check ........................................381 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................382 Removal and Installation ......................................382 DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ......................383 Component Description .......................................383 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................383 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................383 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................384 Removal and Installation ......................................384 DTC P0500 VSS .....................................................385 Description ...........................................................385 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................385 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................385 Overall Function Check ........................................386 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................386 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ......................................387 Description ...........................................................387 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................387 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................387 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................388 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ......................................389 Description ...........................................................389 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................389 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................389 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................390 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR .....................................391 Component Description .......................................391 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.391 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................391 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................391 Wiring Diagram ....................................................392 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................393 Component Inspection .........................................395 DTC P0605 ECM ....................................................396 Component Description .......................................396 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................396 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................396 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................397 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY .......................399 Component Description .......................................399 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................399 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................399 Wiring Diagram ....................................................400 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................401 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .....................................................................403 Component Description .......................................403 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.403 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................403 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................403 Wiring Diagram ....................................................404 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................407

EC-4

Component Inspection ........................................ 409 Removal and Installation ..................................... 409 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR ........................................................... 410 Component Description ....................................... 410 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 410 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 410 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................411 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION ............................................................. 412 Description .......................................................... 412 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 412 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 412 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 413 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 414 Component Inspection ........................................ 417 Remove and Installation ...................................... 417 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY ................................................................... 418 Component Description ....................................... 418 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 418 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 418 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 418 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 420 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 421 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ....... 423 Component Description ....................................... 423 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 423 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 423 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 424 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 425 Component Inspection ........................................ 426 Removal and Installation ..................................... 427 DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 .................................... 428 Component Description ....................................... 428 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 428 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 428 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 429 Overall Function Check ....................................... 430 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 430 Component Inspection ........................................ 432 Removal and Installation ..................................... 433 DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 .................................... 434 Component Description ....................................... 434 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 434 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 434 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 435 Overall Function Check ....................................... 436 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 436 Component Inspection ........................................ 438 Removal and Installation ..................................... 439 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 .................................... 440 Component Description ....................................... 440 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 440 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................. 440

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 441

Overall Function Check ....................................... 441 A

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 443

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 446

Component Inspection ......................................... 449 EC Removal and Installation ..................................... 450

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 .................................... 451

Component Description ....................................... 451

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 451

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 451

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 452 D

Overall Function Check ....................................... 452

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 454

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 457 E Component Inspection ......................................... 460

Removal and Installation ..................................... 461

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ... 462 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 462 F

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 462

Overall Function Check ....................................... 463

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 463 G

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT ......................... 464

Description ........................................................... 464

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 464 H DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 464

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 464

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ........... 465 Description ........................................................... 465

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 465

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 465 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 465 J

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR

A/T MODELS) ........................................................ 466

Description ........................................................... 466 K CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 467

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 467 L Overall Function Check ....................................... 468

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 470

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 472 Main 12 Causes of Overheating .......................... 477 M

Component Inspection ......................................... 477

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR

M/T MODELS) ........................................................ 478

Description ........................................................... 478

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 479

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 479

Overall Function Check ....................................... 480

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 482

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 484

Main 12 Causes of Overheating .......................... 489

Component Inspection ......................................... 489

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ....................................... 490

Component Description ....................................... 490

On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 490

DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 490

EC-5

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 491 Removal and Installation ..................................... 491 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ....................................... 492 Component Description ....................................... 492 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 492 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 492 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 493 Removal and Installation ..................................... 493 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ............... 494 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 494 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 494 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 495 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 496 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............................. 499 Description ........................................................... 499 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 499 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 500 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 500 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 501 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 503 Component Inspection ......................................... 506 Removal and Installation ..................................... 506 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE .................................................................... 507 Component Description ....................................... 507 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 507 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 507 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 508 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 509 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 510 Component Inspection ......................................... 512 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ............... 514 Component Description ....................................... 514 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 514 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 514 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 515 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 516 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 517 Component Inspection ......................................... 519 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ..................... 521 Component Description ....................................... 521 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 521 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 521 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 522 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 523 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 527 Component Inspection ......................................... 537 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR .... 538 Component Description ....................................... 538 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 538 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 538 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 539 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ..................................... 540 Component Description ....................................... 540

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode .540
On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................540 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................540 Overall Function Check ........................................541 Wiring Diagram ....................................................542 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................545 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................549 Description ...........................................................549 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.549 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................549 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................549 Wiring Diagram ....................................................550 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................551 Component Inspection .........................................553 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ........................554 Component Description .......................................554 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.554 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................554 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................555 Wiring Diagram ....................................................556 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................557 Component Inspection .........................................559 Removal and Installation ......................................560 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................561 Component Description .......................................561 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.561 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................561 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................562 Wiring Diagram ....................................................563 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................564 Component Inspection .........................................567 Removal and Installation ......................................567 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................568 Component Description .......................................568 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.568 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................568 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................569 Wiring Diagram ....................................................570 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................571 Component Inspection .........................................574 Removal and Installation ......................................574 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR .....................................575 Component Description .......................................575 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.575 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................575 DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................576 Wiring Diagram ....................................................577 Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................578 Component Inspection .........................................582 Removal and Installation ......................................582 IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................583 Component Description .......................................583 Wiring Diagram ....................................................584

EC-6

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 589 Component Inspection ........................................ 594 Removal and Installation ..................................... 594 INJECTOR CIRCUIT .............................................. 595 Component Description ....................................... 595 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 595 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 596 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 598 Component Inspection ........................................ 600 Removal and Installation ..................................... 600 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ........................................... 601 Description .......................................................... 601 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 601 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 602 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 603 Component Inspection ........................................ 606 Removal and Installation ..................................... 606 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................ 607 Component Description ....................................... 607 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 608 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 609 Removal and Installation ......................................611 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ............................... 612 Description .......................................................... 612 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 612 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 612 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ........................................ 613 Component Description ....................................... 613 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 613 Wiring Diagram ................................................... 614 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 618 Component Inspection ........................................ 628 ASCD INDICATOR ................................................ 629

Component Description ....................................... 629

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

. 629

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 630

Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 631 EC MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ..................... 632

Wiring Diagram .................................................... 632

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM .................... 634 Description ........................................................... 634 C

Component Inspection ......................................... 637

Removal and Installation ..................................... 638

How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ..................... 638 D

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY

(ORVR) ................................................................... 641

System Description .............................................. 641 E Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 642

Component Inspection ......................................... 644

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION .............. 647 Description ........................................................... 647 F

Component Inspection ......................................... 647

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 649

System Description .............................................. 649 G

Component Description ....................................... 651

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ... 652

Fuel Pressure ...................................................... 652 H Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................ 652

Calculated Load Value ......................................... 652

Mass Air Flow Sensor .......................................... 652 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................ 652

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .................. 652

Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ........................ 652 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater ......................... 652 J

Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ...................... 652

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ................... 652

Throttle Control Motor .......................................... 653 K Injector ................................................................. 653

Fuel Pump ........................................................... 653

EC-7

INDEX FOR DTC

PFP:00024

Alphabetical Index

ABS00804

NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
×:Applicable --: Not applicable

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

DTC*1
CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

Trip

MIL lighting up

Reference page

A/T INTERLOCK

P1730

1730

AT-166

A/T TCC S/V FNCTN

P0744

0744

AT-129

APP SEN 1/CIRC

P2122

2122

EC-554

APP SEN 1/CIRC

P2123

2123

EC-554

APP SEN 2/CIRC

P2127

2127

EC-561

APP SEN 2/CIRC

P2128

2128

EC-561

APP SENSOR

P2138

2138

EC-575

ASCD BRAKE SW

P1572

1572

EC-521

ASCD SW

P1564

1564

EC-514

ASCD VHL SPD SEN

P1574

1574

EC-538

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC

P0710

0710

AT-153

BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT

P1805

1805

EC-549

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

U1000

1000*5

EC-139

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

U1001

1001*5

EC-139

CKP SEN/CIRCUIT

P0335

0335

EC-297

CLOSED LOOP-B1

P1148

1148

EC-462

CLOSED LOOP-B2

P1168

1168

EC-462

CMP SEN/CIRC-B1

P0340

0340

EC-303

CMP SEN/CIRC-B2

P0345

0345

EC-303

CTP LEARNING

P1225

1225

EC-490

CTP LEARNING

P1226

1226

EC-492

CYL 1 MISFIRE

P0301

0301

EC-286

CYL 2 MISFIRE

P0302

0302

EC-286

CYL 3 MISFIRE

P0303

0303

EC-286

CYL 4 MISFIRE

P0304

0304

EC-286

CYL 5 MISFIRE

P0305

0305

EC-286

CYL 6 MISFIRE

P0306

0306

EC-286

D/C SOLENOID/CIRC

P1762

1762

AT-196

D/C SOLENOID FNCTN

P1764

1764

AT-201

ECM

P0605

0605

1 or 2

× or --

EC-396

ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT

P1065

1065

EC-399

ECT SEN/CIRCUIT

P0117

0117

EC-181

ECT SEN/CIRCUIT

P0118

0118

EC-181

ECT SENSOR

P0125

0125

EC-193

ENG OVER TEMP

P1217

1217

EC-466(A/T) EC-478(M/T)

ENGINE SPEED SIG

P0725

0725

AT-122

EC-8

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
ETC ACTR ETC FUNCTION/CIRC ETC MOT ETC MOT PWR ETC MOT PWR EVAP GROSS LEAK EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EVAP SMALL LEAK EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP VERY SML LEAK FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC FR/B SOLENOID FNCT FTT SEN/CIRCUIT FTT SEN/CIRCUIT FTT SENSOR FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 HLR/C SOL FNCTN HLR/C SOL/CIRC HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2) HO2S1 (B2) HO2S1 (B2) HO2S1 (B2) HO2S1 (B2) HO2S1 HTR (B1) HO2S1 HTR (B1) HO2S1 HTR (B2) HO2S1 HTR (B2) HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B1)

INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

Trip

P1121

1121

P1122

1122

P1128

1128

P1124

1124

P1126

1126

P0455

0455

P0441

0441

P0442

0442

P0451

0451

P0452

0452

P0453

0453

P0456

0456

P1757

1757

P1759

1759

P0182

0182

P0183

0183

P0181

0181

P0460

0460

P0461

0461

P0462

0462

P0171

0171

P0174

0174

P0172

0172

P0175

0175

P1769

1769

P1767

1767

P0132

0132

P0133

0133

P0134

0134

P1143

1143

P1144

1144

P0152

0152

P0153

0153

P0154

0154

P1163

1163

P1164

1164

P0031

0031

P0032

0032

P0051

0051

P0052

0052

P0138

0138

P0139

0139

EC-9

MIL lighting up

Reference page

EC-410

EC-412

EC-423

EC-418

EC-361

EC-316

EC-321

EC-344

EC-347

EC-353

EC-369

AT-186

AT-191

EC-275

EC-270

EC-379

EC-381

EC-383

EC-254

EC-262

AT-210

AT-205

EC-201

EC-211

EC-224
M

EC-428

EC-434

EC-201

EC-211

EC-224

EC-428

EC-434

EC-145

EC-234

EC-243

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2) HO2S2 HTR (B2) I/C SOLENOID/CIRC I/C SOLENOID FNCTN IAT SEN/CIRCUIT IAT SEN/CIRCUIT IAT SENSOR INT/V TIM CONT-B1 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 ISC SYSTEM ISC SYSTEM KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC LC/B SOLENOID FNCT LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC MAF SEN/CIRCUIT MAF SEN/CIRCUIT MAF SEN/CIRCUIT MULTI CYL MISFIRE NATS MALFUNCTION NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT PNP SW/CIRC PURG VOLUME CONT/V PURG VOLUME CONT/V PURG VOLUME CONT/V PW ST P SEN/CIRC SENSOR POWER/CIRC

INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

Trip

P1146

1146

P1147

1147

P0158

0158

P0159

0159

P1166

1166

P1167

1167

P0037

0037

P0038

0038

P0057

0057

P0058

0058

P1752

1752

P1754

1754

P0112

0112

P0113

0113

P0127

0127

P0011

0011

P0021

0021

P1111

1111

P1136

1136

P0506

0506

P0507

0507

P0327

0327

P0328

0328

P0745

0745

P1774

1774

P1772

1772

P0101

0101

P0102

0102

P0103

0103

P0300

0300

P1610 - P1615

1610 - 1615

No DTC

Flashing*4

P0000

0000

P1706

1706

P0705

0705

P0444

0444

P0445

0445

P1444

1444

P0550

0550

P1229

1229

EC-10

MIL lighting up

Reference page

EC-440

EC-451

EC-234

EC-243

EC-440

EC-451

EC-153

AT-177

AT-182

EC-176

EC-196

EC-142

EC-403

EC-387

EC-389

EC-292

AT-134

AT-220

AT-215

EC-161

EC-169

EC-286

EC-62

Flashing*4

EC-63

EC-540

AT-112

EC-330

EC-499

EC-391

EC-494

INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

Trip

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC

P0740

0740

TCS C/U FUNCTN

P1211

1211

TCS/CIRC

P1212

1212

THERMSTAT FNCTN

P0128

0128

TP SEN 1/CIRC

P0222

0222

TP SEN 1/CIRC

P0223

0223

TP SEN 2/CIRC

P0122

0122

TP SEN 2/CIRC

P0123

0123

TP SEN/CIRC A/T

P1705

1705

TP SENSOR

P2135

2135

TURBINE REV S/CIRC

P1716

1716

TW CATALYST SYS-B1

P0420

0420

TW CATALYST SYS-B2

P0430

0430

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6

P0720

0720

VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6

P0500

0500

VENT CONTROL VALVE

P0447

0447

VENT CONTROL VALVE

P1446

1446

*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: When engine is running. *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.

MIL lighting up

Reference page

AT-124

EC-464

EC-465

EC-199

EC-279

EC-186

AT-151

EC-568

AT-159

EC-311

AT-117

EC-385

EC-337

EC-507

EC-11

INDEX FOR DTC

DTC No. Index

ABS00805

DTC*1
CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

Trip

MIL lighting up

Reference page

No DTC

Flashing*4

NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.

Flashing*4

EC-63

U1000

1000*5

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

EC-139

U1001

1001*5

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

EC-139

P0000

0000

NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.

P0011

0011

INT/V TIM CONT-B1

EC-142

P0021

0021

INT/V TIM CONT-B2

EC-142

P0031

0031

HO2S1 HTR (B1)

EC-145

P0032

0032

HO2S1 HTR (B1)

EC-145

P0037

0037

HO2S2 HTR (B1)

EC-153

P0038

0038

HO2S2 HTR (B1)

EC-153

P0051

0051

HO2S1 HTR (B2)

EC-145

P0052

0052

HO2S1 HTR (B2)

EC-145

P0057

0057

HO2S2 HTR (B2)

EC-153

P0058

0058

HO2S2 HTR (B2)

EC-153

P0101

0101

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-161

P0102

0102

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-169

P0103

0103

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-169

P0112

0112

IAT SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-176

P0113

0113

IAT SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-176

P0117

0117

ECT SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-181

P0118

0118

ECT SEN/CIRCUIT

EC-181

P0122

0122

TP SEN 2/CIRC

EC-186

P0123

0123

TP SEN 2/CIRC

EC-186

P0125

0125

ECT SENSOR

EC-193

P0127

0127

IAT SENSOR

EC-196

P0128

0128

THERMSTAT FNCTN

EC-199

P0132

0132

HO2S1 (B1)

EC-201

P0133

0133

HO2S1 (B1)

EC-211

P0134

0134

HO2S1 (B1)

EC-224

P0138

0138

HO2S2 (B1)

EC-234

P0139

0139

HO2S2 (B1)

EC-243

P0152

0152

HO2S1 (B2)

EC-201

P0153

0153

HO2S1 (B2)

EC-211

P0154

0154

HO2S1 (B2)

EC-224

P0158

0158

HO2S2 (B2)

EC-234

EC-12

INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

P0159

0159

P0171

0171

P0172

0172

P0174

0174

P0175

0175

P0181

0181

P0182

0182

P0183

0183

P0222

0222

P0223

0223

P0300

0300

P0301

0301

P0302

0302

P0303

0303

P0304

0304

P0305

0305

P0306

0306

P0327

0327

P0328

0328

P0335

0335

P0340

0340

P0345

0345

P0420

0420

P0430

0430

P0441

0441

P0442

0442

P0444

0444

P0445

0445

P0447

0447

P0451

0451

P0452

0452

P0453

0453

P0455

0455

P0456

0456

P0460

0460

P0461

0461

P0462

0462

P0500

0500

P0506

0506

P0507

0507

P0550

0550

P0605

0605

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
HO2S2 (B2) FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 FTT SENSOR FTT SEN/CIRCUIT FTT SEN/CIRCUIT TP SEN 1/CIRC TP SEN 1/CIRC MULTI CYL MISFIRE CYL 1 MISFIRE CYL 2 MISFIRE CYL 3 MISFIRE CYL 4 MISFIRE CYL 5 MISFIRE CYL 6 MISFIRE KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EVAP SMALL LEAK PURG VOLUME CONT/V PURG VOLUME CONT/V VENT CONTROL VALVE EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP GROSS LEAK EVAP VERY SML LEAK FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 ISC SYSTEM ISC SYSTEM PW ST P SEN/CIRC ECM
EC-13

Trip
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 or 2

MIL lighting up

Reference page

× × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × -- -- × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × -- × or --

EC-243

EC-254

EC-262

EC-254

EC-262

EC-270

EC-275

EC-279

EC-286
F
EC-286

EC-286

EC-286
H
EC-286

EC-292

EC-297

EC-303

EC-311

EC-316

EC-321

EC-330

EC-337
M
EC-344

EC-347

EC-353

EC-361

EC-369

EC-379

EC-381

EC-383

EC-385

EC-387

EC-389

EC-391

EC-396

INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

Trip

P0705

0705

PNP SW/CIRC

P0710

0710

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC

P0720

0720

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6

P0725

0725

ENGINE SPEED SIG

P0740

0740

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC

P0744

0744

A/T TCC S/V FNCTN

P0745

0745

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC

P1065

1065

ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT

P1111

1111

INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1

P1121

1121

ETC ACTR

P1122

1122

ETC FUNCTION/CIRC

P1124

1124

ETC MOT PWR

P1126

1126

ETC MOT PWR

P1128

1128

ETC MOT

P1136

1136

INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2

P1143

1143

HO2S1 (B1)

P1144

1144

HO2S1 (B1)

P1146

1146

HO2S2 (B1)

P1147

1147

HO2S2 (B1)

P1148

1148

CLOSED LOOP-B1

P1163

1163

HO2S1 (B2)

P1164

1164

HO2S1 (B2)

P1166

1166

HO2S2 (B2)

P1167

1167

HO2S2 (B2)

P1168

1168

CLOSED LOOP-B2

P1211

1211

TCS C/U FUNCTN

P1212

1212

TCS/CIRC

P1217

1217

ENG OVER TEMP

P1225

1225

CTP LEARNING

P1226

1226

CTP LEARNING

P1229

1229

SENSOR POWER/CIRC

P1444

1444

PURG VOLUME CONT/V

P1446

1446

VENT CONTROL VALVE

P1564

1564

ASCD SW

P1572

1572

ASCD BRAKE SW

P1574

1574

ASCD VHL SPD SEN

P1610 - P1615

1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION

P1705

1705

TP SEN/CIRC A/T

P1706

1706

P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT

P1716

1716

TURBINE REV S/CIRC

P1730

1730

A/T INTERLOCK

EC-14

MIL lighting up

Reference page

AT-112

AT-153

AT-117

AT-122

AT-124

AT-129

AT-134

EC-399

EC-403

EC-410

EC-412

EC-418

EC-423

EC-403

EC-428

EC-434

EC-440

EC-451

EC-462

EC-428

EC-434

EC-440

EC-451

EC-462

EC-464

EC-465

EC-466(A/T) EC-478(M/T)

EC-490

EC-492

EC-494

EC-499

EC-507

EC-514

EC-521

EC-538

EC-62

AT-151

EC-540

AT-159

AT-166

INDEX FOR DTC

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

Trip

P1752

1752

I/C SOLENOID/CIRC

P1754

1754

I/C SOLENOID FNCTN

P1757

1757

FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC

P1759

1759

FR/B SOLENOID FNCT

P1762

1762

D/C SOLENOID/CIRC

P1764

1764

D/C SOLENOID FNCTN

P1767

1767

HLR/C SOL/CIRC

P1769

1769

HLR/C SOL FNCTN

P1772

1772

LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC

P1774

1774

LC/B SOLENOID FNCT

P1805

1805

BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT

P2122

2122

APP SEN 1/CIRC

P2123

2123

APP SEN 1/CIRC

P2127

2127

APP SEN 2/CIRC

P2128

2128

APP SEN 2/CIRC

P2135

2135

TP SENSOR

P2138

2138

APP SENSOR

MIL lighting up

Reference page

AT-177

AT-182

AT-186

AT-191

AT-196

AT-201

AT-205

AT-210

AT-215

AT-220

EC-549

EC-554

EC-561

EC-568

EC-575

EC-15

PRECAUTIONS

PFP:00001

Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT

BELT PRE-TENSIONER"

ABS008G2

The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
WARNING: q To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
q Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section.
q Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T

ABS00808

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION: q Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
q Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
q Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-65, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" .
q Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
q Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc.
q Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.

Precaution

ABS00809

q Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
q Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running.
q Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is turned OFF.
q Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect battery ground cable.

SEF289H

EC-16

PRECAUTIONS
q Do not disassemble ECM. q If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value. The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
q When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure.
q When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
q Securely connect ECM harness connectors. A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs.
q Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc.
q Keep engine control system parts and harness dry. q Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-96 . q Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. q Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor. q Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. q Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator. q Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious incidents. q Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS).
EC-17

A EC
C
PBIB1164E
D E F G
SEC406D
H I J K
PBIB0090E
L M
MEF040D

PRECAUTIONS
q After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the "DTC Confirmation Procedure" if the repair is completed. The "Overall Function Check" should be a good result if the repair is completed.
q When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow the two tester probes to contact. Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and damage the ECM power transistor.
q Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

SEF217U

q B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown in the figure.
EC-18

SEF348N SEC893C

PRECAUTIONS
q Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. q Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
q Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting. q Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily. q Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
q When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location.
Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units.
Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the harness of electronic controls. Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave radio can be kept smaller.
Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: q GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" q PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: q GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" q GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"

A
EC
C
PBIB1011E
D
E
F
G
SEF709Y
H
I
J
K
SEF708Y ABS0080A
L
M

EC-19

PREPARATION

Special Service Tools
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name

Description

PFP:00002
ABS0080B

KV10117100 (J-36471-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench

Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut

KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench

S-NT379

Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in)

(J-44321) Fuel pressure gauge kit

S-NT636

Checking fuel pressure

KV109E0010 (J-46209) Break-out box

LEC642

Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester

KV109E0080 (J-45819) Y-cable adapter

S-NT825

Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester

EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter

S-NT826 S-NT564

Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in)

EC-20

Commercial Service Tools
Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) Leak detector i.e.: (J41416)
EVAP service port adapter i.e.: (J41413-OBD)
Fuel filler cap adapter i.e.: (MLR-8382)
Socket wrench
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner i.e.: (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12)
Anti-seize lubricant i.e.: (PermatexTM 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A907)

PREPARATION
Description Locating the EVAP leak

ABS0080C
A
EC

S-NT703

C
D
Applying positive pressure through EVAP service port
E

S-NT704 S-NT815 S-NT705 AEM488

F
Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure
G

Removing and installing engine coolant

temperature sensor

Reconditioning the exhaust system threads

before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with

anti-seize lubricant shown below.

a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor

b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for

Titania Oxygen Sensor

Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads.

S-NT779

EC-21

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram

PFP:23710
ABS0080D

EC-22

PBIB2287E

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Vacuum Hose Drawing

ABS0080E
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

Refer to EC-22, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System.
EC-23

PBIB1552E

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

System Chart

ABS0080F

Input (Sensor)

ECM Function

Output (Actuator)

q Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Fuel injection & mixture ratio control

Fuel injector

q Crankshaft position sensor (POS) q Mass air flow sensor q Engine coolant temperature sensor q Heated oxygen sensor 1 q Throttle position sensor q Accelerator pedal position sensor q Park/neutral position (PNP) switch q Intake air temperature sensor

Electronic ignition system Fuel pump control ASCD vehicle speed control On board diagnostic system Intake valve timing control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control

Power transistor Fuel pump relay Electric throttle control actuator MIL (On the instrument panel)*4 Intake valve control solenoid valve Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

q Power steering pressure sensor q Ignition switch q Battery voltage q Knock sensor q Refrigerant pressure sensor

EVAP canister purge flow control Air conditioning cut control Cooling fan control

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
Air conditioner relay*4
Cooling fan relay*4

q Stop lamp switch

q ASCD steering switch

q ASCD brake switch

q ASCD clutch switch q Fuel level sensor*1 *3

q EVAP control system pressure sensor q Fuel tank temperature sensor*1 q Heated oxygen sensor 2*2 q TCM (Transmission control module)*3 q Air conditioner switch*3 q Wheel sensor*3 q Electrical load signal*3

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system EVAP canister vent control valve

*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis. *2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions. *3: This input signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *4: This output signal is sent from the ECM through CAN communication line.

EC-24

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

ABS0080G
A

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Engine speed*3

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Piston position

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Heated oxygen sensor 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Throttle position sensor

Throttle position

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Accelerator pedal position

Fuel injection

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

Gear position

& mixture ratio Fuel injector

control

Knock sensor

Engine knocking condition

Battery

Battery voltage*3

Power steering pressure sensor

Power steering operation

Heated oxygen sensor 2*1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Air conditioner switch*2

Air conditioner operation

Wheel sensor*2

Vehicle speed

*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.

*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of I time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the

ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined

by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air

flow sensor.

VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION

In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat- K ing conditions as listed below.

q During warm-up

q When starting the engine

q During acceleration

q Hot-engine operation

q When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)

q High-load, high-speed operation

q During deceleration

q During high engine speed operation

EC-25

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB0121E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way catalyst 1 can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about heated oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-201 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture). This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst 1. Even if the switching characteristics of heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated oxygen sensor 2. Open Loop Control The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. q Deceleration and acceleration q High-load, high-speed operation q Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit q Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature q High engine coolant temperature q During warm-up q After shifting from N to D (A/T models) q When starting the engine MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of "injection pulse duration" to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios. "Fuel trim" refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. "Short term fuel trim" is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean. "Long term fuel trim" is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
EC-26

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
A

Two types of systems are used.

SEF179U

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used E
when the engine is running.

Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System

Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of

the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.

The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.

This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.

FUEL SHUT-OFF

Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.

Electronic Ignition (EI) System
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

ABS0080H

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Engine speed*2

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Piston position

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Throttle position sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor

Throttle position Accelerator pedal position

Ignition timing control

Power transistor

Knock sensor

Engine knocking

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

Gear position

Battery

Battery voltage*2

Wheel sensor*1

Vehicle speed

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best airfuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown. The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec A °BTDC During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
q At starting
q During warm-up

SEF742M

EC-27

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

q At idle
q At low battery voltage
q During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.

Air Conditioning Cut Control

ABS0080I

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Air conditioner switch*1

Air conditioner ON signal

Throttle position sensor

Throttle position

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Accelerator pedal position

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine coolant temperature sensor
Battery

Engine speed*2 Engine coolant temperature Battery voltage*2

Air conditioner cut control

Air conditioner relay

Refrigerant pressure sensor

Refrigerant pressure

Power steering pressure sensor

Power steering operation

Wheel sensor*1

Vehicle speed

*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off. q When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. q When cranking the engine. q At high engine speeds. q When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. q When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. q When engine speed is excessively low. q When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed)

ABS0080J

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

Neutral position

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Accelerator pedal position

Engine coolant temperature sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine coolant temperature Engine speed

Fuel cut control

Fuel injector

Wheel sensor*

Vehicle speed

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.

EC-28

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

NOTE: This function is different from deceleration control listed under "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System", EC-25 . A

CAN communication

ABS0080K

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC

tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-

tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other

control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 C

communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.

Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

Refer to LAN-4, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail.

EC-29

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

PFP:00018
ABS0080L

With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING Any of following two methods may be used. Method A 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. 2. Check ignition timing.
Method B 1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil.

SEF058Y PBIB1287E

2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire.
EC-30

PBIB1019E PBIB1097E

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

3. Check ignition timing.

C
SEF166Y
D
E

G
PBIB1655E

Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.

ABS0080M
H

q Battery

q Ignition system

q Engine oil and coolant levels

q Fuses

q ECM harness connector

q Vacuum hoses

q Air intake system

(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)

q Fuel pressure

q Engine compression

q Throttle valve

q Evaporative emission system

2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF.

3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio,

checks should be carried out while shift lever is in N position.

4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.

5. Turn off headlamp, heater blower, rear window defogger.

6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.

EC-31

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE

EC-32

PBIB2001E

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. INSPECTION START

1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for

scheduled maintenance.

2. Open engine hood and check the following:

Harness connectors for improper connections

Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut

Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections

Hoses and ducts for leaks

Air cleaner clogging

Gasket

3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. Head lamp switch is OFF. Air conditioner switch is OFF.

E
SEF983U

Rear window defogger switch is OFF.

Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.

4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature

indicator points the middle of gauge.

Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.

5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

I
SEF976U
J K L

2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.

M
SEF977U

EC-33

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.

3. Read idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)

SEF978U

SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute. 3. Check idle speed.
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine. 2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
EC-34

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A

Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.

2. GO TO 4.

7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

D With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Read idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) F
Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Check idle speed.

A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10.

NG >> GO TO 8.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-303 .

q Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-297 .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> 1. Repair or replace.

2. GO TO 4.

9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION M
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .

>> GO TO 4.

EC-35

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle. 2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in N or P position) M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 11.
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine. 2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17.
EC-36

PBIB1655E

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN A

1. Run engine at idle.

2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. EC
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in N or P position)

M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)

OK or NG

OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.

OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20.

NG >> GO TO 16.

16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

PBIB1655E
E

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-56, "TIMING CHAIN" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 17.

NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.

2. GO TO 4.

17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-303 .

q Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-297 .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace.

2. GO TO 4.

18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but

this is a rare the case.)

2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to

BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .

M >> GO TO 4.

EC-37

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

19. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 2. See "HO2S1 MNTR (B1)" in "DATA MONITOR" mode. 3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is
warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH LEAN RICH 2 times: RICH LEAN RICH LEAN RICH
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG (Monitor does not fluctuate.)>>GO TO 23. NG (Monitor fluctuates less than 5 times.)>>GO TO 31.
20. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) SIGNAL

PBIB0120E

Without CONSULT-II 1. Stop engine and set ECM to Self-diagnostic mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to EC-64,
"HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . 2. Start engine and run it at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.),
check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22. NG (MIL does not come on)>>GO TO 23. NG (MIL comes on less than 5 times)>>GO TO 31.
21. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II 1. See "HO2S1 MNTR (B2)" in "DATA MONITOR" mode. 2. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is
warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH LEAN RICH 2 times: RICH LEAN RICH LEAN RICH
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (Monitor does not fluctuate.)>>GO TO 24. NG (Monitor fluctuates less than 5 times.)>>GO TO 31.

PBIB0120E

EC-38

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

22. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) SIGNAL A

Without CONSULT-II

1. Switch the monitored sensor from bank 1 to bank 2. Refer to EC-64, "How to Switch Monitored Sensor

From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa" .

2. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.),

check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds.

OK or NG

OK >> INSPECTION END

NG (MIL does not come on)>>GO TO 24.

NG (MIL comes on less than 5 times)>>GO TO 31.

23. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) HARNESS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) terminal 1.

Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-203, "BANK 1" .

Continuity should exist.

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 25.

NG >> 1. Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1).

2. GO TO 4.

24. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) HARNESS

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) terminal 1. K
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-205, "BANK 2" .

Continuity should exist.

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 25.

NG >> 1. Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2).

2. GO TO 4.

25. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

>> GO TO 26.
26. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 27.

EC-39

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

27. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

Refer to EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 28. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 29. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
28. CHECK CO%

With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 3. Select "ENG COOLANT TEMP" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. 4. Set "ENG COOLANT TEMP" to 5°C (41°F) by touching "DWN"
and "Qd". 5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no-load, then run engine at idle speed. 6. Check CO%.

Idle CO: 0.7 - 9.9% and engine runs smoothly. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 31. NG >> GO TO 30.
29. CHECK CO%

SEF172Y

Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 4. Connect a resistor (4.4 k) between terminals of engine coolant
temperature sensor harness connector. 5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no-load, then run engine at idle speed. 6. Check CO%.

Idle CO: 0.7 - 9.9% and engine runs smoothly.
7. After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 31. NG >> GO TO 30.

SEF982UA

30. RECONNECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.

>> GO TO 34.

EC-40

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

31. REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 A
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 on the malfunctioning bank. EC

With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 32.

Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 33.

32. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge.

2. See "HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)" in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), E check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds.

1 time: RICH LEAN RICH

2 times: RICH LEAN RICH LEAN RICH

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> GO TO 34.

33. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) SIGNAL

Without CONSULT-II

1. Set ECM to Self-diagnostic mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO

SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .

2. Switch the monitored sensor to the malfunctioning bank. Refer to EC-64, "How to Switch Monitored Sensor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa" .
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.), J check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> GO TO 34.

34. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
q Check fuel pressure regulator and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-44, "Fuel Pressure Check" . M q Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-161 and EC-
169 .
q Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-595 .
q Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC181 and EC-193 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 36. NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 35.

EC-41

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

35. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed. Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-39, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .

>> GO TO 4.
36. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .

>> GO TO 4.

Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION

ABS0080N

Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.

OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION

ABS0080O

Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.

OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.

Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION

ABS0080P

Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:

q Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.

q Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.

PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
q Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) q Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) q PNP switch: ON
q Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)

EC-42

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine

is started, the headlamp will not be illuminated.

q Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)

q Vehicle speed: Stopped

q Transmission: Warmed-up

For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/

T" system indicates less than 0.9V.

For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.

OPERATION PROCEDURE

With CONSULT-II

1. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.

5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.

6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.

H
SEF217Z
I
J

L
SEF454Y

7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If

"CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be

carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci-

dent by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.

8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.

ITEM Idle speed
Ignition timing

SPECIFICATION
A/T: 650±50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650±50 rpm (in neutral position)
A/T: 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15±5° BTDC (in neutral position)

MBIB0238E

Without CONSULT-II NOTE: q It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. q It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
EC-43

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds.

SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.

ITEM

SPECIFICATION

Idle speed

A/T: 650±50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650±50 rpm (in neutral position)

Ignition timing

A/T: 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15±5° BTDC (in neutral position)

13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below.

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: q Engine stalls. q Erroneous idle.

Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

ABS0080Q

EC-44

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT"

mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine.

4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel

pressure.

5. Turn ignition switch OFF.

Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.

SEF214Y
D
E
F

PBIB1910E

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.

NOTE: q Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel I
pressure cannot be completely released because V35 models do not have fuel return system.

q Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit (J-44321) to check fuel pressure.

1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .

2. Install the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting between fuel

damper and injector tube.

3. Connect the fuel pressure test gauge (quick connector adapter

hose) to the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting.

4. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.

5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.

6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.

At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following.
q Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging q Fuel filter for clogging q Fuel pump q Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace.

M
PBIB1662E

EC-45

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

PFP:00028

Introduction

ABS0080R

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:

Emission-related diagnostic information

SAE Mode

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

Mode 3 of SAE J1979

Freeze Frame data

Mode 2 of SAE J1979

System Readiness Test (SRT) code

Mode 1 of SAE J1979

1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)

Mode 7 of SAE J1979

1st Trip Freeze Frame data

Test values and Test limits

Mode 6 of SAE J1979

Calibration ID

Mode 9 of SAE J1979

The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable --: Not applicable

DTC

1st trip DTC

Freeze Frame data

1st trip Freeze Frame data

SRT code

Test value

CONSULT-II

GST

×*1

ECM

×*2

*1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display. *2: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.

The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-76 .)

Two Trip Detection Logic

ABS0080S

When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip> The "trip" in the "Two Trip Detection Logic" means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
×: Applicable --: Not applicable

MIL

DTC

1st trip DTC

Items

1st trip

Blinking

Lighting up

2nd trip

Blinking

Lighting up

1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip displaying displaying displaying

2nd trip display-
ing

Misfire (Possible three way cata-

lyst damage) -- DTC: P0300 -

P0306 is being detected

Misfire (Possible three way cata-

lyst damage) -- DTC: P0300 -

P0306 is being detected

One trip detection diagnoses (Refer to EC-8 .)

Except above

When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function.

EC-46

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the

driver to repair the malfunction.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

Emission-related Diagnostic Information
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

EC ABS0080T

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

SRT code

Test value/ Test limit (GST only)

1st trip DTC

Reference page

CAN COMM CIRCUIT CAN COMM CIRCUIT

U1000

1000*5

EC-139

U1001

1001*5

EC-139

NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. INT/V TIM CONT-B1 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 HO2S1 HTR (B1) HO2S1 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S1 HTR (B2) HO2S1 HTR (B2) HO2S2 HTR (B2) HO2S2 HTR (B2) MAF SEN/CIRCUIT

P0000

0000

P0011

0011

EC-142

P0021

0021

EC-142

P0031

0031

EC-145

P0032

0032

EC-145

P0037

0037

G
EC-153

P0038

0038

EC-153

P0051

0051

EC-145

P0052

0052

EC-145

P0057

0057

EC-153

P0058

0058

EC-153

P0101

0101

EC-161

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT MAF SEN/CIRCUIT

P0102

0102

EC-169

P0103

0103

EC-169

IAT SEN/CIRCUIT IAT SEN/CIRCUIT ECT SEN/CIRCUIT

P0112

0112

EC-176

P0113

0113

EC-176

P0117

0117

EC-181

ECT SEN/CIRCUIT TP SEN 2/CIRC

P0118

0118

EC-181

P0122

0122

EC-186

TP SEN 2/CIRC ECT SENSOR IAT SENSOR THERMSTAT FNCTN HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B1) HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B1) HO2S1 (B2) HO2S1 (B2) HO2S1 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1

P0123

0123

EC-186

P0125

0125

EC-193

P0127

0127

EC-196

P0128

0128

EC-199

P0132

0132

EC-201

P0133

0133

EC-211

P0134

0134

EC-224

P0138

0138

EC-234

P0139

0139

EC-243

P0152

0152

EC-201

P0153

0153

EC-211

P0154

0154

EC-224

P0158

0158

EC-234

P0159

0159

EC-243

P0171

0171

EC-254

EC-47

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 FTT SENSOR FTT SEN/CIRCUIT FTT SEN/CIRCUIT TP SEN 1/CIRC TP SEN 1/CIRC MULTI CYL MISFIRE CYL 1 MISFIRE CYL 2 MISFIRE CYL 3 MISFIRE CYL 4 MISFIRE CYL 5 MISFIRE CYL 6 MISFIRE KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EVAP SMALL LEAK PURG VOLUME CONT/V PURG VOLUME CONT/V VENT CONTROL VALVE EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP SYS PRES SEN EVAP GROSS LEAK EVAP VERY SML LEAK FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 ISC SYSTEM ISC SYSTEM PW ST P SEN/CIRC ECM PNP SW/CIRC ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

P0172

0172

P0174

0174

P0175

0175

P0181

0181

P0182

0182

P0183

0183

P0222

0222

P0223

0223

P0300

0300

P0301

0301

P0302

0302

P0303

0303

P0304

0304

P0305

0305

P0306

0306

P0327

0327

P0328

0328

P0335

0335

P0340

0340

P0345

0345

P0420

0420

P0430

0430

P0441

0441

P0442

0442

P0444

0444

P0445

0445

P0447

0447

P0451

0451

P0452

0452

P0453

0453

P0455

0455

P0456

0456

P0460

0460

P0461

0461

P0462

0462

P0500

0500

P0506

0506

P0507

0507

P0550

0550

P0605

0605

P0705

0705

P0710

0710

SRT code
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- × × × × -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ×*4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

EC-48

Test value/ Test limit (GST only)
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- × × × × -- -- -- -- -- -- -- × -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

1st trip DTC
× × × × × × -- -- × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × or -- × ×

Reference page
EC-262 EC-254 EC-262 EC-270 EC-275 EC-275 EC-279 EC-279 EC-286 EC-286 EC-286 EC-286 EC-286 EC-286 EC-286 EC-292 EC-292 EC-297 EC-303 EC-303 EC-311 EC-311 EC-316 EC-321 EC-330 EC-330 EC-337 EC-344 EC-347 EC-353 EC-361 EC-369 EC-379 EC-381 EC-383 EC-385 EC-387 EC-389 EC-391 EC-396 AT-112 AT-153

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 ENGINE SPEED SIG TCC SOLENOID/CIRC A/T TCC S/V FNCTN L/PRESS SOL/CIRC ECM BACK UP/CIRC INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 ETC ACTR ETC FUNCTION/CIRC ETC MOT PWR ETC MOT PWR ETC MOT INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B1) HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B1) CLOSED LOOP-B1 HO2S1 (B2) HO2S1 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 (B2) CLOSED LOOP-B2 TCS C/U FUNCTN TCS/CIRC
ENG OVER TEMP
CTP LEARNING CTP LEARNING SENSOR POWER/CIRC PURG VOLUME CONT/V VENT CONTROL VALVE ASCD SW ASCD BRAKE SW ASCD VHL SPD SEN
NATS MALFUNCTION
TPV SEN/CIRC A/T P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT TURBINE REV S/CIRC A/T INTERLOCK I/C SOLENOID/CIRC I/C SOLENOID FNCTN

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

P0720

0720

P0725

0725

P0740

0740

P0744

0744

P0745

0745

P1065

1065

P1111

1111

P1121

1121

P1122

1122

P1124

1124

P1126

1126

P1128

1128

P1136

1136

P1143

1143

P1144

1144

P1146

1146

P1147

1147

P1148

1148

P1163

1163

P1164

1164

P1166

1166

P1167

1167

P1168

1168

P1211

1211

P1212

1212

SRT code
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- × × × × -- × × × × -- -- --

P1217

1217

P1225

1225

P1226

1226

P1229

1229

P1444

1444

P1446

1446

P1564

1564

P1572

1572

P1574

1574

P1610 P1615

1610 - 1615

P1705

1705

P1706

1706

P1716

1716

P1730

1730

P1752

1752

P1754

1754

EC-49

Test value/ Test limit (GST only)
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- × × × × -- × × × × -- -- --
--
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
--
-- -- -- -- -- --

1st trip DTC

Reference page

AT-117

AT-122

AT-124

AT-129

AT-134

EC-399

EC-403

EC-410

EC-412

EC-418

EC-423

EC-403

EC-428

EC-434

EC-440
H

EC-451

EC-462

EC-428

EC-434

EC-440

EC-451

EC-462

EC-464

EC-465

EC-466(A/T)
EC-478(M/T) L

EC-490

EC-492

EC-494

EC-499

EC-507

EC-514

EC-521

EC-538

EC-62

AT-151

EC-540

AT-159

AT-166

AT-177

AT-182

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms)

DTC*1

CONSULT-II GST*2

ECM*3

SRT code

Test value/ Test limit (GST only)

1st trip DTC

Reference page

FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC

P1757

1757

AT-186

FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC

P1759

1759

AT-191

D/C SOLENOID/CIRC

P1762

1762

AT-196

D/C SOLENOID FNCTN

P1764

1764

AT-201

HLR/C SOL/CIRC

P1767

1767

AT-205

HLR/C SOL FNCTN

P1769

1769

AT-210

LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC

P1772

1772

AT-215

LC/B SOLENOID FNCT

P1774

1774

AT-220

BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT

P1805

1805

EC-549

APP SEN 1/CIRC

P2122

2122

EC-554

APP SEN 1/CIRC

P2123

2123

EC-554

APP SEN 2/CIRC

P2127

2127

EC-561

APP SEN 2/CIRC

P2128

2128

EC-561

TP SENSOR

P2135

2135

EC-568

APP SENSOR

P2138

2138

EC-575

*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG. *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates.

DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-47, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/ component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II. 1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-72, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair.

How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. With CONSULT-II With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc.

EC-50

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.

(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)

No Tools

The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.

Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc. These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.

q 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.

q Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi- C cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-

mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if

available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc- D

tion is displayed in "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many

times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.

If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].

If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].

PBIB0911E

FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-

perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake

air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.

Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.

The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or

GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For details, see EC-109, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .

Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the

ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority

for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once L

freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no

longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-

lowing priorities to update the data.

Priority

Items

Freeze frame data

Misfire -- DTC: P0300 - P0306 Fuel Injection System Function -- DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175

Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)

1st trip freeze frame data

For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory. Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

EC-51

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979. As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating "INCMP", use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to "CMPLT". In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT status will indicate "CMPLT" for each application system. Once set as "CMPLT", the SRT status remains "CMPLT" until the self-diagnosis memory is erased. Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate "INCMP" for these items. NOTE: The SRT will also indicate "INCMP" if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours. If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates "CMPLT" for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates "INCMP" for one or more of the SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested. NOTE: If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates "CMPLT" for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT ("CMPLT") and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
EC-52

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

SRT Item

The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to "CMPLT".

SRT item (CONSULT-II indica-
tion)

Performance Pri-
ority*1

Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to "CMPLT"

Corresponding DTC

No.

CATALYST

Three way catalyst function

P0420, P0430

EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM

EVAP control system

P0442
C
P0456

EVAP control system purge flow monitoring

P0441

HO2S

Heated oxygen sensor 1

P0133, P0153

P1143, P1163

Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor 2

P1144, P1164

P0139, P0159

Heated oxygen sensor 2

P1146, P1166

HO2S HTR

Heated oxygen sensor 2

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater

P1147, P1167

P0031, P0032, P0051,

P0052

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

P0037, P0038, P0057,

P0058

*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for

models with CONSULT-II.

SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as "CMPLT" after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and I is shown in the table below.

Self-diagnosis result

Diagnosis

Example

Ignition cycle

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

All OK

Case 1

P0400 P0402

OK (1) OK (1)

-- (1) -- (1)

OK (2) -- (1)

-- (2)
K
OK (2)

P1402

OK (1)

OK (2)

-- (2)

Case 2

SRT of EGR P0400

"CMPLT" OK (1)

"CMPLT" -- (1)

"CMPLT"

-- (1)

P0402 P1402

-- (0) OK (1)

-- (0) OK (2)

OK (1) -- (2)

-- (1)

-- (2)

SRT of EGR

"INCMP"

"CMPLT"

NG exists

Case 3

P0400

P0402

P1402

(Consecutive

NG)

(1st trip) DTC

1st trip DTC

DTC (= MIL "ON")

SRT of EGR

"INCMP"

"CMPLT"

OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. --: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.

When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will indicate "CMPLT". Case 1 above

EC-53

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate "CMPLT" at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. Case 2 above If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate "CMPLT". Case 3 above The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as "INCMP" is one (1) for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following reasons: q The SRT will indicate "CMPLT" at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. q The emissions inspection requires "CMPLT" of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. q When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to "CMPLT" of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. q If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate "INCMP".
NOTE: SRT can be set as "CMPLT" together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates "CMPLT". SRT Service Procedure If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating "INCMP", review the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
EC-54

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

*1 EC-50

*2 EC-55

How to Display SRT Code
WITH CONSULT-II Selecting "SRT STATUS" in "DTC CONFIRMATION" mode with CONSULT-II. For items whose SRT codes are set, a "CMPLT" is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set, "INCMP" is displayed. A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right. "INCMP" means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. "CMPLT" means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
WITH GST Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)

*3 EC-56

EC-55

A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M
SEF573XA
SEF935Z

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
How to Set SRT Code To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table on EC-53, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
EC-56

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Driving Pattern
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-57

PBIB1053E

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
q The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc. Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest. Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following: q Sea level q Flat road q Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) q Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed. Pattern 1: q The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of -10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). q The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V). q The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V). Pattern 2: q When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. Pattern 3: q The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times. Pattern 4: q Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes. q The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving. q If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again. *1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again. *2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern. 1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle. 2. Repeat driving pattern shown at right at least 10 times. During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. *3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
SEF414S
Suggested Transmission Gear Position Set the selector lever in the D position. Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits.
EC-58

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:

For quick acceleration in low altitude

areas and high altitude areas

[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:

Gear change

ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH)

km/h (MPH)

1st to 2nd

21 (13)

13 (8)

24 (15)

2nd to 3rd

37 (23)

26 (16)

40 (25)

3rd to 4th 4th to 5th

48 (30) 60 (37)

40 (25) 45 (28)

64 (40)

72 (45)

6th

68 (42)

53 (33)

80 (50)

D Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi- E tions to ensure sage operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause

engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Gear

km/h (MPH)

1st

56 (35)

2nd

96 (60)

3rd

136 (85)

4th

5th

6th

TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY -- NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)

The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979.

The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while

being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the

maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.

These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-

played on the GST screen.

Test value

Item

Self-diagnostic test item

DTC

(GST display) Test limit

Conversion

CATALYST

Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) Three way catalyst function (Bank 2)

P0420 P0420 P0430 P0430

TID CID 01H 01H 02H 81H 03H 02H 04H 82H

Max. Min. Max. Min.

L
1/128

1/128

EVAP SYSTEM

EVAP control system (Small leak) EVAP control system purge flow monitoring

P0442 P0441

05H 03H 06H 83H

Max. Min.

1/128mm2 20mV

EVAP control system (Very small leak)

P0456

07H 03H

Max.

1/128mm2

EC-59

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

Test value

Item

Self-diagnostic test item

DTC

(GST display) Test limit

Conversion

TID CID

P0133

09H 04H

Max.

16ms

P1143

0AH 84H

Min.

10mV

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (Bank 1)

P1144 P0132

0BH 04H 0CH 04H

Max. Max.

10mV 10mV

P0134

0DH 04H

Max.

P0153

11H 05H

Max.

16ms

P1163

12H 85H

Min.

10mV

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (Bank 2)

P1164

13H 05H

Max.

10mV

HO2S

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1)

P0152 P0154 P0139 P1147 P1146

14H 05H 15H 05H 19H 86H 1AH 86H 1BH 06H

Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.

10mV 1s
10mV/500ms 10mV 10mV

P0138

1CH 06H

Max.

10mV

P0159

21H 87H

Min.

10mV/500ms

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (Bank 1)

P1167 P1166 P0158 P0032 P0031

22H 87H 23H 07H 24H 07H 29H 08H 2AH 88H

Min. Max. Max. Max. Min.

10mV 10mV 10mV 20mV 20mV

HO2S HEATER

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2)

P0052 P0051 P0038 P0037 P0058 P0057

2BH 09H 2CH 89H 2DH 0AH 2EH 8AH 2FH 0BH 30H 8BH

Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min.

20mV 20mV 20mV 20mV 20mV 20mV

HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION How to Erase DTC
WITH CONSULT-II The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting "ERASE" in the "SELFDIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II. If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch "A/T".
3. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".
4. Touch "ERASE". [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch "BACK" twice.
5. Touch "ENGINE".
6. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".

EC-60

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
7. Touch "ERASE". (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) A

SCIA5334E

WITH GST

The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST.

NOTE:

If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip step 2.

1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.

Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.

2. Perform AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased.)

3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).

NO TOOLS

NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip step 2.

1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.

2. Perform AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased.)

3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .

q If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.

q The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.

Diagnostic trouble codes

1st trip diagnostic trouble codes

Freeze frame data

1st trip freeze frame data

EC-61

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

System readiness test (SRT) codes Test values Others Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.

IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System -- NATS)

ABS0080U

q If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the ON position or "NATS MALFUNCTION" is displayed on "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to BL-132, "IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)" .

q Confirm no self-diagnostic results of IVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching "ERASE" in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II.

q When replacing ECM, initialization of IVIS (NATS) system

and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be

SEF543X

carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.

Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS)

initialization and IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual,

IVIS/NVIS.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-25, "WARNING LAMPS" , or see EC-632 .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.

ABS0080V

SEF217U

EC-62

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.

Diagnostic Test Mode
Mode I

KEY and ENG. Status
Ignition switch in ON position

Function BULB CHECK

Explanation of Function

This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,

open circuit, etc.).

If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.

Engine stopped
D

Engine running

MALFUNCTION WARNING

Mode II

Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

ON position

RESULTS

Engine stopped

This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip

detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver

that a malfunction has been detected.

The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in

the 1st trip.

q Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)

q One trip detection diagnoses

This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.

Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or

MONITOR

rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.

When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is

malfunction on engine control system.

Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as L NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means

of operating fail-safe function.

The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the

driver to repair the malfunction.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

MIL Flashing Without DTC If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diagnostic test mode. EC-64, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later. EC64, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. q Diagnostic trouble codes q 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes q Freeze frame data q 1st trip freeze frame data q System readiness test (SRT) codes q Test values q Others
EC-63

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE NOTE: q It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. q It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction. q Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF. How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking. 4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
PBIB0092E
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor) 1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-64, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . 2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). ECM will start heated oxygen sensor 1 monitoring from the bank 1 sensor. How to Switch Monitored Sensor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa 1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal quickly and then release it immediately. 2. Make sure that monitoring sensor has changed by MIL blinking as follows.
PBIB0093E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-64, "How to Set Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM. 3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
EC-64

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I -- BULB CHECK In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI- A 25, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-632 .

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I -- MALFUNCTION WARNING
EC

MIL

Condition

When the malfunction is detected.

OFF

No malfunction.

This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II -- SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.

The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test

mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are

displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-

tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to

read a code.

PBIA3905E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The "zero" is indicated

by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds

consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.

The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.

A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later

numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.

A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.

In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-

function. (See EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" )

How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC64, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . q If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours. q Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II -- HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR
In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated oxygen sensor 1.

EC-65

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

MIL

Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas

Lean

OFF

Rich

*Remains ON or OFF

Any condition

*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.

Air fuel ratio feedback control condition Closed loop system Open loop system

To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge. Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the MIL comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.

OBD System Operation Chart
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS

ABS0080W

q When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory.

q When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-46, "Two Trip Detection Logic" .

q The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the counter will reset.

q The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The "TIME" in "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.

q The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.

SUMMARY CHART

Items

Fuel Injection System

Misfire

MIL (goes off)

3 (pattern B)

DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display)

80 (pattern C)

1st Trip DTC (clear)

1 (pattern C), *1

1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear)

*1, *2

For details about patterns B and C under "Fuel Injection System" and "Misfire", see EC-68 . For details about patterns A and B under "Other", see EC-70 . *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

Other 3 (pattern B) 40 (pattern A) 1 (pattern B) 1 (pattern B)

EC-66

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR "MISFIRE

" <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, "FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM"

*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up.

*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions.

*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared.

*5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM.

SEF392S
*3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared at the moment OK is detected.

EC-67

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR "MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>", "FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM" <Driving Pattern B> Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. q The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. q The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction. q The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART) <Driving Pattern C> Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: q When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F). q When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F). Example: If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions: Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C (158°F) q The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above. q The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction. q The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. q The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
EC-68

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR

"MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>", "FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM"

*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up.

*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions.

*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared.

*5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM.

SEF393SD
*3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehicle is driven once (pattern B) without the same malfunction.

EC-69

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR "MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>", "FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM" <Driving Pattern A>
AEC574
q The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4). q The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. q The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40. <Driving Pattern B> Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. q The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. q The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. q The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
EC-70

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Introduction
INTRODUCTION The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-72 . Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example on EC-74 should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.

PFP:00004
A
ABS0080X
EC

MEF036D

G
H
SEF233G
I
J

K
L
SEF234G
M

EC-71

WORK FLOW Flow Chart

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

*1 If time data of "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" is other than [0] or [1t], perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
*4 If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

PBIB1043E

*2 If the incident cannot be verified, per- *3 If the on board diagnostic system

form EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNO-

cannot be performed, check main

SIS FOR INTERMITTENT

power supply and ground circuit.

INCIDENT" .

Refer to EC-130, "POWER SUPPLY

AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .

*5 EC-57

*6 EC-125

EC-72

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Description for Work Flow

STEP

DESCRIPTION

STEP I STEP II STEP III

Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the

EC-73, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
EC
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and the

(1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-60 .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip)

freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.

If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.

(The Symptom Matrix Chart will be useful. See EC-82 .)

Also check related service bulletins for information.

Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.

The DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II

to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.

If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.

STEP IV

Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the DTC Confirmation Procedure. Check and read the (1st

trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.

During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)

mode and check real time diagnosis results.

If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

In case the DTC Confirmation Procedure is not available, perform the Overall Function Check instead. The (1st trip)

DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified check is an effective alternative.

The NG result of the Overall Function Check is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.

Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.

STEP V

If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX. If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-77 .) Then perform inspections

according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-82 .)

STEP VI STEP VII

Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the

system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) Harness Layouts.

Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in "DATA MONITOR

(AUTO TRIG)" mode.

Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II.

Refer to EC-96 , EC-119 . The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit

inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .

Repair or replace the malfunction parts.

If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-

DENT" .

Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and

circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint.

Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident is

still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one.

Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM

and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC

INFORMATION" and AT-39, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)

DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting. Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples:
q Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.

SEF907L

EC-73

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
q Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. Worksheet Sample

MTBL0017

DTC Inspection Priority Chart

ABS0080Y

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart.
NOTE: If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139 .

EC-74

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Priority

Detected items (DTC)

q U1000 U1001 CAN communication line

q P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor

q P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor

q P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor

q P0128 Thermostat function

q P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor

q P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor

q P0327 P0328 Knock sensor

q P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

q P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

q P0460 P0461 P0462 Fuel level sensor

q P0500 Vehicle speed sensor

q P0605 ECM

q P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch

q P1229 Sensor power supply

q P1610 - P1615 NATS

q P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
G
q P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor

q P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater

q P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

q P0132 P0133 P0134 P0152 P0153 P0154 P1143 P1144 P1163 P1164 Heated oxygen sensor 1

q P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 P1146 P1147 P1166 P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 2

q P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring

q P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

q P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve

q P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor

q P0550 Power steering pressure sensor

q P0710 P0720 P0725 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1705 P1716 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759 P1762 P1764 P1767

P1769 P1772 P1774 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches

q P1065 ECM power supply

q P1111 P1136 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

q P1122 Electric throttle control function

q P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator

q P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
M
q P1805 Brake switch

q P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control

q P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function q P0300 - P0306 Misfire

q P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function

q P0442 P0455 P0456 EVAP control system q P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system

q P1121 Electric throttle control actuator

q P1148 P1168 Closed loop control q P1211 TCS control unit

q P1212 TCS communication line

q P1564 ASCD steering switch q P1572 ASCD brake switch

q P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor

EC-75

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Fail-safe Chart

ABS0080Z

When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

DTC No. Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

P0102 P0103

Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

P0117 P0118

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.

Condition

Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display)

Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START

40°C (104°F)

More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START

80°C (176°F)

Except as shown above

40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time)

When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running.

P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P2135

Throttle position sensor

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor.

P1121

Electric throttle control actuator

(When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction:) ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.

(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:) ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.

(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:) While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.

P1122

Electric throttle control function

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P1124 P1126

Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P1128 Throttle control motor

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P1229 Sensor power supply

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138

Accelerator pedal position sensor

q When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut

EC-76

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Basic Inspection
1. INSPECTION START

ABS00810
A

1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for

scheduled maintenance.

2. Open engine hood and check the following:

Harness connectors for improper connections

Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut

Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections

Hoses and ducts for leaks D
Air cleaner clogging

Gasket

3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. Headlamp switch is OFF. Air conditioner switch is OFF.

E
SEF983U

Rear window defogger switch is OFF.

Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.

4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature

indicator points the middle of gauge.

Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.

5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under noload.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

I
SEF976U
J
K
L

2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.

M
SEF977U

EC-77

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.

3. Read idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)

SEF978U

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A

Refer to EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?

YES or NO

YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.

2. GO TO 4.

7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

D With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Read idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) F
Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Check idle speed.

A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10.

NG >> GO TO 8.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-303 .

q Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-297 .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> 1. Repair or replace.

2. GO TO 4.

>> GO TO 4.

EC-79

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle. 2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position) OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11.
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine. 2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17.
EC-80

PBIB1655E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN A

1. Run engine at idle.

2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. EC
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)

M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)

OK or NG

OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 16.
D

16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

PBIB1655E
E

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-56, "TIMING CHAIN" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 17.

NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.

2. GO TO 4.

17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-303 .

q Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-297 .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace.

2. GO TO 4.

18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but

this is a rare case.)

2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to

EC-62, "IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System -- NATS)" .

M >> GO TO 4.

EC-81

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Symptom Matrix Chart
SYSTEM -- BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM

ABS00811

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

Reference page

Warranty symptom code

Fuel Fuel pump circuit

Fuel pressure regulator system

Injector circuit

Evaporative emission system

Air

Positive crankcase ventilation sys-

tem

Incorrect idle speed adjustment

Electric throttle control actuator

Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment Ignition circuit
Main power supply and ground circuit

Mass air flow sensor circuit

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit

Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit

Throttle position sensor circuit
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
Knock sensor circuit Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit Vehicle speed signal circuit Power steering pressure sensor circuit

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

11232

2 EC-601

334444444

EC-44

11232

EC-595

334444444

EC-634

4444444 33
1111

41 1

EC-647 EC-31

112332222

EC-410, EC-412

33111

EC-31

11222

EC-583

22333

EC-130

EC-161, EC-169
EC-181, EC-193

EC-201,

EC-211 ,

EC-224 ,

EC-428 ,

EC-434

321

EC-186, EC-279 , EC-490 , EC-492 , EC-568
EC-494, EC-554 , EC-561 , EC-575

EC-292

EC-297

EC-303

EC-385

EC-391

EC-82

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A

Reference

page

Warranty symptom code ECM

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

22333333333

EC-396,

EC-399

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit

13223

EC-403

PNP switch circuit

EC-540

Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit

Electrical load signal circuit

EC-607
H
EC-612

Air conditioner circuit

223333333

2 ATC-38

VDC/TCS/ABS control unit

1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page)

SYSTEM -- ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

BRC-10

SYMPTOM

Reference

page

Warranty symptom code

Fuel

Fuel tank

Fuel piping

Vapor lock

Valve deposit

Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane)

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

555

FL-11

EM-38

555

EC-83

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM

Reference page

Warranty symptom code

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Air

Air duct

EM-16

Air cleaner

EM-16

Air leakage from air duct

(Mass air flow sensor -- electric throttle control actuator)

Electric throttle control actuator

EM-16 EM-18

Air leakage from intake manifold/ Collector/Gasket

EM-18, EM-23

Cranking Battery Generator circuit

111

SC-4 1
SC-20

Starter circuit

Signal plate

SC-9

EM-110

PNP switch

AT-112 or MT-12

Engine

Cylinder head Cylinder head gasket

55555

EM-92

Cylinder block

Piston

Piston ring Connecting rod

66666

EM-110

Bearing

Crankshaft

Valve mechanism

Timing chain Camshaft Intake valve timing control

55555

EM-56

EM-76

EM-56

Intake valve Exhaust valve

EM-92

Exhaust

Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ Gasket
Three way catalyst

55555

EM-25, EX3

Lubrication

Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler

EM-29, LU-

12 , LU-9 ,

LU-10

Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil

LU-6

EC-84

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
A

Reference

page

Warranty symptom code

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Cooling

Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap

CO-13,

CO-18

Thermostat Water pump Water gallery

55555

CO-32
G
CO-26
CO-34

Cooling fan
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant

CO-22

CO-10

IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System -- NATS)

EC-62 or

BL-132

1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
J

EC-85

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Engine Control Component Parts Location

ABS00812

EC-86

PBIB1792E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-87

PBIB1793E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

EC-88

PBIB1954E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

F
PBIB1189E
G
H

PBIB1284E

EC-89

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

EC-90

PBIB1794E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-91

PBIB1654E

Circuit Diagram
A/T MODELS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ABS00813

EC-92

TBWT0638E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-93

TBWT0639E

M/T MODELS

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

EC-94

TBWT0637E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-95

TBWT0409E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout

ABS00814

ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1. ECM is located behind the passenger side instrument lower panel. For this inspection, remove passenger side instrument lower panel.
2. Remove ECM harness connector.

PBIB1192E ABS00815

3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
q Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
q Data is for comparison and may not be exact.

PBIB1278E

SEC406D

ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

ECM ground

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

Body ground

EC-96

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.

DATA (DC Voltage)

Approximately 8V
EC

3 W/R

Throttle control motor relay power supply

[Engine is running] q Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
[Ignition switch: ON]

4 BR

Throttle control motor (Close)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) q Accelerator pedal is released

PBIB0519E
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

0 - 14V
F

0 - 14V

PBIB1104E
H

[Ignition switch: ON]

Throttle control motor (Open)

q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)

q Accelerator pedal is fully depressed

PBIB1105E

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the

following conditions are met.

Engine: after warming up

0 - 1.0V

Keeping the engine speed between 3,500

BR/W

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2)

and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped [Engine is running]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

q Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

10 W/G

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm
quickly

7 - 12V

PBIB1790E

EC-97

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

11 R/W

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm
quickly

DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 7 - 12V

12 L/W 13 BR

Power steering pressure sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

[Engine is running] q Steering wheel is being turned. [Engine is running] q Steering wheel is not being turned.

0.5 - 4.5V 0.4 - 0.8V

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

Approximately 1.2V

Approximately 1.1V

PBIB1790E PBIB1041E

[Engine is running] q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

14 Y

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

1.0 - 4.0V

[Engine is running] q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

PBIB1042E PBIB1039E

15 W 16 LG

Knock sensor
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Idle speed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

EC-98

PBIB1040E
Approximately 2.5V
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

21 G 22 R/Y 23 R/B

Injector No. 5 Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

q Warm-up condition

q Idle speed

NOTE:

The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at

idle.

SEC984C

BATTERY VOLTAGE

[Engine is running]

(11 - 14V)
E

q Warm-up condition

q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

24 G/B 25 P/B 32 P

SEC985C
G
Approximately 8V

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.

H
I
PBIB0519E

[Engine is running]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.

(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the

following conditions are met.

Engine: after warming up

0 - 1.0V

Keeping the engine speed between 3,500

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1)

and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped [Engine is running]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

q Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.

EVAP control system pressure sensor

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V

EC-99

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

33 OR

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 1)

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

1.0 - 4.0V

PBIB1039E

[Engine is running] q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

34 Y/G 35 W/B
40 P 41 R/L 42 R/W

Intake air temperature sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1)
Injector No. 6 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2

[Engine is running]
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

PBIB1040E
Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with intake air temperature.
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

SEC984C

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

SEC985C

EC-100

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ITEM

CONDITION

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage)

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

45 L/Y

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

SEC990C

BATTERY VOLTAGE

[Engine is running]

(11 - 14V)
E

q Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More

than 100 seconds after starting engine).

47 B

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

SEC991C
G
Approximately 5V

48 B/Y

Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] sure sensor)

Approximately 5V

49 W/L

Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

More than 0.36V

q Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)

q Accelerator pedal fully released

50 W

Throttle position sensor 1

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

q Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)

Less than 4.75V

q Accelerator pedal fully depressed

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

0.9 - 1.2V

q Idle speed

51 OR

Mass air flow sensor

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

1.6 - 1.9V

q Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

55 R/Y

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

EC-101

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

60 PU/W 61 L/R 62 Y/R

Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

0 - 0.2V

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

0.1 - 0.4V

SEC986C

66 W/R 67 B/W 68 Y
69 R/L
70 R/B 73 Y/B 74 L/B 78 B/Y

SEC987C

Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

Sensor ground

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)

Less than 4.75V

Throttle position sensor 2

q Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)

More than 0.36V

q Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Refrigerant pressure sensor

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON.
(Compressor operates.)

1.0 - 4.0V

Engine coolant temperature sensor

[Engine is running]

Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with engine coolant temperature.

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met.
After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

EC-102

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

79 GY/R 80 GY 81 G/R

Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

0 - 0.2V

0.1 - 0.4V

EC
C
SEC986C
D

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

82 GY/L 83 B/R 85 PU 86 R 90 BR/Y 91 G 94 L
98 LG/B
99 G/Y

Sensor ground (APP sensor 1)
Sensor ground (APP sensor 2)
Data link connector

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] q CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected.

CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON]

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1)
Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

[Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON]

CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON]

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2
ASCD steering switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] q ASCD steering switch: OFF [Ignition switch: ON] q ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q CANCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q COAST/SET switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] q ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed

F
SEC987C

Approximately 0V

Approximately 5V - Battery volt-

age (11 - 14V)

Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V

Output voltage varies with the

communication status.

Approximately 5V
K
Approximately 5V

Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V

Output voltage varies with the

communication status.

0.15 - 0.60V

1.95 - 2.40V Approximately 4V Approximately 0V Approximately 1V Approximately 2V Approximately 3V

EC-103

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

101 P/L

Stop lamp switch

102 G/OR PNP switch

104 G/W

Throttle control motor relay

106 BR

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

107 L/OR

Fuel tank temperature sensor

108 SB

ASCD brake switch

109 W/L

Ignition switch

111 W

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

113 B/OR Fuel pump relay

115 B/R 116 B
117 GY/L

ECM ground
EVAP canister vent control valve

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is fully released

Approximately 0V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is depressed

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

Approximately 0V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Except the above gear position

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: ON]

0 - 1.0V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal fully released

0.5 - 1.0V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal fully depressed

3.9 - 4.7V

[Engine is running]

Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel tank temperature.

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is depressed (A/T models) q Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are
depressed (M/T models)

Approximately 0V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is fully released (A/T models) q Brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully
released (M/T models)

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: OFF]

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF]
q For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF

0 - 1.5V

[Ignition switch: OFF]
q More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: ON] q For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: ON]
q More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON.

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

Body ground

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

EC-104

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

119 P 120 L
121 R/W

Power supply for ECM
Power supply for ECM (Back-up)

[Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

CONSULT-II Function
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode

Function

ABS00816
D

Work support Self-diagnostic results

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the

indications on the CONSULT-II unit.

Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.*

Data monitor

Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.

Data monitor (SPEC)

Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the other data monitor items can be read.

CAN diagnostic support monitor

The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.

Active test

Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also

shifts some parameters in a specified range.

DTC & SRT confirmation

The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.

Function test ECM part number

This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.

ECM part number can be read.

*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.

q Diagnostic trouble codes

q 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes

q Freeze frame data

q 1st trip freeze frame data

q System readiness test (SRT) codes

q Test values

q Others

EC-105

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

Item

WORK SUPPORT

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

DTC*1

FREEZE FRAME DATA*2

DATA MONITOR

DATA MONITOR (SPEC)

ACTIVE TEST

DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION

SRT STATUS

DTC WORK SUPPORT

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Mass air flow sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor

Heated oxygen sensor 1

Heated oxygen sensor 2

Vehicle speed sensor

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS INPUT

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Throttle position sensor

Fuel tank temperature sensor

EVAP control system pressure sensor

Intake air temperature sensor

Knock sensor

Refrigerant pressure sensor

Closed throttle position switch (accelerator pedal position sensor signal)

Air conditioner switch

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

Stop lamp switch

Power steering pressure sensor

Battery voltage

Load signal Fuel level sensor ASCD steering switch ASCD brake switch ASCD clutch switch

EC-106

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Item

WORK SUPPORT

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

A
DTC & SRT

RESULTS

DTC*1

FREEZE FRAME DATA*2

DATA MONITOR

DATA MONITOR (SPEC)

ACTIVE TEST

CONFIRMATION

SRT STATUS

DTC WORK SUPPORT

Injector

Power transistor (Ignition timing)

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS OUTPUT

Throttle control motor relay

Throttle control motor

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

Air conditioner relay

×
E

Fuel pump relay

Cooling fan relay

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

EVAP canister vent control valve

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

Calculated load value

X: Applicable

*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. *2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data

mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-51 .

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:

If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be

detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Connect "CONSULT-II" and "CONSULT-II CONVERTER" to

data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener handle.

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".

PHIA0096E

EC-107

MBIB0233E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. Touch "ENGINE". If "ENGINE" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .

6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.

SEF995X

WORK SUPPORT MODE Work Item

PBIB2308E

WORK ITEM

CONDITION

USAGE

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

q FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING "START" DUR- When releasing fuel pressure

ING IDLING.

from fuel line

CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.

IDLE AIR VOL LEARN

q THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM.

When learning the idle air volume

SELF-LEARNING CONT

q THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value FICIENT.

EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE

CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN When detecting EVAP vapor leak ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE point of EVAP system FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
q IGN SW "ON"
q ENGINE NOT RUNNING
q AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
q NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM
q FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
q WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE"
q WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY "BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY", EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.

EC-108

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

WORK ITEM TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ*

CONDITION q IDLE CONDITION

USAGE
A
When setting target idle speed

TARGET IGN TIM ADJ*

q IDLE CONDITION

*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.

When adjusting target ignition timing
EC

SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item

Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)

Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data

Freeze frame data item*

Description

DIAG TROUBLE CODE [PXXXX]

q The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to E
EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)

FUEL SYS-B1

q "Fuel injection system status" at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

q One mode in the following is displayed.

Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction

FUEL SYS-B2

Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)

Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control

Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop

CAL/LD VALUE [%] q The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F]

q The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] q "Long-term fuel trim" at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

q The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule

L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]

than short-term fuel trim.

S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] q "Short-term fuel trim" at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

q The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel

S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]

schedule.

ENGINE SPEED [rpm]

q The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

VEHICL SPEED [km/ h] or [mph]

q The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

B/FUEL SCHDL [msec]

q The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F]

q The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

*: This item is the same as that of 1st trip freeze frame data.

DATA MONITOR MODE Monitored Item

×: Applicable

Monitored item [Unit]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

Remarks

ENG SPEED [rpm]

q Accuracy becomes poor if engine

q Indicates the engine speed computed from

speed drops below the idle rpm.

the signals of the crankshaft position sensor

(POS) and camshaft position sensor

q If the signal is interrupted while the

(PHASE).

engine is running, an abnormal value

may be indicated.

MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] ×

q The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor q When the engine is stopped, a certain

is displayed.

value is indicated.

EC-109

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitored item [Unit]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

B/FUEL SCHDL [msec]

A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]

A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]

COOLAN TEMP/S [°C] or [°F]

HO2S1 (B1) [V]

HO2S1 (B2) [V]

HO2S2 (B1) [V]

HO2S2 (B2) [V]

HO2S1 MNTR (B1) [RICH/LEAN]

HO2S1 MNTR (B2) [RICH/LEAN]

HO2S2 MNTR (B1) [RICH/LEAN]

HO2S2 MNTR (B2) [RICH/LEAN]

VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph]

BATTERY VOLT [V]

ACCEL SEN 1 [V]

ACCEL SEN 2 [V]

THRTL SEN 1 [V]

THRTL SEN 2 [V]

FUEL T/TEMP SE [°C] or [°F]

INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F]

EVAP SYS PRES [V]

FUEL LEVEL SE [V]

START SIGNAL [ON/OFF]

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

Remarks

q "Base fuel schedule" indicates the fuel injec-

tion pulse width programmed into ECM, prior

to any learned on board correction.

q When the engine is stopped, a certain

q The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback value is indicated.

correction factor per cycle is indicated.

q This data also includes the data for the

air-fuel ratio learning control.

q When the engine coolant temperature

q The engine coolant temperature (determined sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM

by the signal voltage of the engine coolant

enters fail-safe mode. The engine cool-

temperature sensor) is displayed.

ant temperature determined by the

ECM is displayed.

q The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sen-

sor 1 is displayed.

q The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is displayed.

q Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal dur- q After turning ON the ignition switch,

ing air-fuel ratio feedback control:

"RICH" is displayed until air-fuel mix-

RICH: means the mixture became "rich", and

ture ratio feedback control begins.

control is being affected toward a leaner mix-

ture.

q When the air-fuel ratio feedback is

LEAN: means the mixture became "lean", and clamped, the value just before the

control is being affected toward a rich mixture. clamping is displayed continuously.

q Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal: RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small. LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large.

q When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated.

q The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle

speed signal sent from combination meter is

displayed.

q The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.

q ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by q The accelerator pedal position sensor signal

voltage is displayed.

ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage signal.

q The throttle position sensor signal voltage is q THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by

displayed.

ECM internally. Thus, it differ from

ECM terminal voltage signal.

q The fuel temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed.

q The intake air temperature (determined by the

signal voltage of the intake air temperature

sensor) is indicated.

q The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed.

q The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed.

q Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] com-

puted by the ECM according to the signals of

q After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal.

engine speed and battery voltage.

EC-110

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitored item [Unit]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

A
Remarks

q Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by

CLSD THL POS [ON/OFF]

ECM according to the accelerator pedal posi-

tion sensor signal.

AIR COND SIG [ON/OFF]

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condi-

tioner switch as determined by the air condi-

tioner signal.

P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF]

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/ neutral position (PNP) switch signal.

q [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering sys-

PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/OFF]

tem (determined by the signal voltage of the power steering pressure sensor signal) is

indicated.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electri-

cal load signal.

LOAD SIGNAL [ON/OFF]

ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/ or lighting switch is in 2nd position.

OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and

lighting switch are OFF.

IGNITION SW [ON/OFF]

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch signal.

HEATER FAN SW [ON/OFF]

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan switch signal.

BRAKE SW

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop

[ON/OFF]

lamp switch signal.

INJ PULSE-B1 [msec]
INJ PULSE-B2 [msec]

q Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width

compensated by ECM according to the input q When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated.

signals.

IGN TIMING [BTDC]

q Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to the input signals.

q When the engine is stopped, a certain

value is indicated.

CAL/LD VALUE [%]

q "Calculated load value" indicates the value of the current air flow divided by peak air flow.

q Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM

MASS AIRFLOW [g·m/s]

according to the signal voltage of the mass air

flow sensor.

q Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume

PURG VOL C/V [%]

control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals.
q The opening becomes larger as the value

increases.

INT/V TIM (B1) [°CA]
INT/V TIM (B2) [°CA]

q Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced angle.

INT/V SOL (B1) [%] INT/V SOL (B2) [%]

q The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
q The advance angle becomes larger as the value increases.

AIR COND RLY [ON/OFF]

q The air conditioner relay control condition

(determined by ECM according to the input

signals) is indicated.

EC-111

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitored item [Unit]
FUEL PUMP RLY [ON/OFF]
VENT CONT/V [ON/OFF]
THRTL RELAY [ON/OFF]
COOLING FAN [HI/LOW/OFF]
HO2S1 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] HO2S1 HTR (B2) [ON/OFF] HO2S2 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] HO2S2 HTR (B2) [ON/OFF] I/P PULLY SPD [rpm]
VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] or [MPH]
IDL A/V LEARN [YET/CMPLT]
TRVL AFTER MIL [km] or [mile]
O2SEN HTR DTY [%]
AC PRESS SEN [V]
VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph]
SET VHCL SPD [km/h] or [mph] MAIN SW [ON/OFF] CANCEL SW [ON/OFF]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

q Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition

determined by ECM according to the input

signals.

q The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON: Closed OFF: Open

q Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condition determined by the ECM according to the input signals.

q The control condition of the cooling fan (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. HI: High speed operation LOW: Low speed operation OFF: Stop

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 1 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals.
q Indicates the engine speed computed from the turbine revolution sensor signal.
q The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from TCM or combination meter is displayed.
q Display the condition of idle air volume learning YET: Idle air volume learning has not been performed yet. CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has already been performed successfully.
q Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
q Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals.
q The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is displayed.
q The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed.
q The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ON/OFF (MAIN) switch signal.
q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal.

EC-112

Remarks

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Monitored item [Unit]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

A
Remarks

RESUME/ACC SW

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ACCEL/

[ON/OFF]

RESUME switch signal.

SET SW

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from COAST/

[ON/OFF]

SET switch signal.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD

BRAKE SW1 [ON/OFF]

brake switch signal, and ASCD clutch switch

signal (M/T models).

BRAKE SW2

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp

[ON/OFF]

switch signal.

q Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.

NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the

VHCL SPD CUT

ASCD set speed.

[NON/CUT]

CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively

high compared with the ASCD set speed, and

ASCD operation is cut off.

q Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.

NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the

LO SPEED CUT

ASCD set speed.

[NON/CUT]

CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively

low compared with the ASCD set speed, and

ASCD operation is cut off.

AT OD MONITOR [ON/OFF]
AT OD CANCEL [ON/OFF]

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D

q For M/T models always "OFF" is dis-

according to the input signal from the TCM.

played.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D can- q For M/T models always "OFF" is dis-

cel signal sent from the TCM.

played.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE

CRUISE LAMP [ON/OFF]

lamp determined by the ECM according to the

input signals.

q Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp

SET LAMP [ON/OFF]

determined by the ECM according to the input

signals.

Voltage [V] Frequency [msec], [Hz] or [%] DUTY-HI DUTY-LOW PLS WIDTH-HI

q Only "#" is displayed if item is unable to L

be measured.

q Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width q Figures with "#"s are temporary ones.

measured by the probe.

They are the same figures as an actual M

piece of data which was just previously

measured.

PLS WIDTH-LOW

NOTE: q Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

EC-113

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE Monitored Item

Monitored item [Unit]

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

MAIN SIGNALS

Description

Remarks

q Indicates the engine speed computed

ENG SPEED [rpm]

from the signals of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position

sensor (PHASE).

MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]

q The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor specification is displayed.

q When engine is running specification range is indicated.

B/FUEL SCHDL [msec]

q "Base fuel schedule" indicates the fuel

injection pulse width programmed into q When engine is running specification ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.

rection.

A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]

q When engine is running specification

q The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.

back correction factor per cycle is indi-

cated.

q This data also includes the data for the

air-fuel ratio learning control.

NOTE: Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

ACTIVE TEST MODE Test Item

TEST ITEM

CONDITION

JUDGEMENT

CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

FUEL INJECTION

q Engine: Return to the original trouble condition
q Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II.

If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM.

q Harness and connectors q Fuel injectors q Heated oxygen sensor 1

IGNITION TIMING

q Engine: Return to the original trouble condition
q Timing light: Set
q Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT-II.

If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM.

q Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.

POWER BALANCE

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine.
q A/C switch: OFF q Shift lever: N q Cut off each injector signal one at
a time using CONSULT-II.

Engine runs rough or dies.

q Harness and connectors q Compression q Fuel injectors q Power transistor q Spark plugs q Ignition coils

COOLING FAN*

q Ignition switch: ON
q Turn the cooling fan "HI", "LOW" and "OFF" using CONSULT-II.

Cooling fan moves and stops.

q Harness and connectors q Cooling fan motor q IPDM E/R

ENG COOLANT TEMP

q Engine: Return to the original trouble condition
q Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II.

If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM.

q Harness and connectors q Engine coolant temperature sen-
sor q Fuel injectors

FUEL PUMP RELAY

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
q Turn the fuel pump relay "ON" and "OFF" using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound.

Fuel pump relay makes the operat- q Harness and connectors

ing sound.

q Fuel pump relay

EC-114

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

TEST ITEM

CONDITION q Engine: After warming up, run

JUDGEMENT

CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
A

engine at 1,500 rpm.

PURG VOL

q Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to q Harness and connectors

CONT/V

volume control solenoid valve

the opening percent.

q Solenoid valve

opening percent using CON-

SULT-II.

FUEL/T TEMP SEN

q Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine

VENT CON-

stopped)

Solenoid valve makes an operating q Harness and connectors

TROL/V

q Turn solenoid valve "ON" and

sound.

q Solenoid valve

"OFF" with the CONSULT-II and

listen to operating sound.

V/T ASSIGN

q Engine: Return to the original trouble condition

q Harness and connectors If trouble symptom disappears, see

ANGLE

q Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM. CONSULT-II.

q Intake valve timing control sole-

noid valve

*: Leaving cooling fan "OFF" with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.

DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

SRT STATUS Mode

For details, refer to EC-52, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" . H
SRT Work Support Mode

This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.

DTC Work Support Mode

Test mode
EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM

Test item PURGE FLOW P0441 EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* EVAP V/S SML LEAK P0456/P1456* PURG VOL CN/V P1444 HO2S1 (B1) P0133 HO2S1 (B1) P0134 HO2S1 (B1) P1143

Condition

Reference page

EC-316
J
EC-321

EC-369

EC-499

EC-211

EC-224
L
EC-428

HO2S1

HO2S1 (B1) P1144 HO2S1 (B2) P0153 HO2S1 (B2) P0154 HO2S1 (B2) P1163

Refer to corresponding trouble diagnosis for DTC.

EC-434

EC-211

EC-224

EC-428

HO2S1 (B2) P1164

EC-434

HO2S2 (B1) P0139

EC-243

HO2S2 (B1) P1146

EC-440

HO2S2

HO2S2 (B1) P1147 HO2S2 (B2) P0159

EC-451 EC-243

HO2S2 (B2) P1166

EC-440

HO2S2 (B2) P1167

EC-451

*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to V35 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.

EC-115

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)

Description

CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching "SETTING" in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

1. "AUTO TRIG" (Automatic trigger):

q The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, "MONITOR" in "DATA MONITOR" screen is changed to "Recording Data ... xx%" as shown at right, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, "REAL-TIME DIAG" screen is displayed. If "STOP" is touched on the screen during "Recording Data ... xx%", "REAL-TIME DIAG" screen is also displayed. The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording speed can be changed by "TRIGGER POINT" and "Recording Speed". Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL.

SEF705Y

2. "MANU TRIG" (Manual trigger):

q DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM. DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected.

SEF707X

EC-116

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Operation

1. "AUTO TRIG"

q While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to

select to "DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)" mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is

detected.

q While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in "DATA MONITOR (AUTO

TRIG)" mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.

When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo- C nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st

trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS in GI-26, "How to Perform Effi-

cient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)

2. "MANU TRIG"

q If the malfunction is displayed as soon as "DATA MONITOR" is selected, reset CONSULT-II to "MANU

TRIG". By selecting "MANU TRIG" you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-

ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.

Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has 8 different functions explained below. ISO9141 is used as the protocol. The name "GST" or "Generic Scan Tool" is used in this service manual.

M
PBIB0197E ABS00817

EC-117

SEF139P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

FUNCTION

Diagnostic test mode

MODE 1

READINESS TESTS

MODE 2

(FREEZE DATA)

MODE 3

DTCs

MODE 4

CLEAR DIAG INFO

MODE 6 MODE 7

(ON BOARD TESTS) (ON BOARD TESTS)

MODE 8

MODE 9

(CALIBRATION ID)

Function
This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer toEC-51, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored by ECM.
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes: q Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1) q Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3) q Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1) q Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2) q Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1) q Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving conditions.
This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed. q EVAP canister vent control valve open In the following conditions, this mode cannot function. q Low ambient temperature q Low battery voltage q Engine running q Ignition switch OFF q Low fuel temperature q Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect "GST" to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener handle.

PHIA0096E

EC-118

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in

the operation manual.

(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are

shown.)

5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the tool maker.

C
SEF398S
D
E
F

SEF416S

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Remarks:

ABS00818
H

q Specification data are reference values.

q Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.

* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.

i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in I

spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM

according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

ENG SPEED

q Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the

tion.

tachometer indication

MAS A/F SE-B1

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) q No-load

2,500 rpm

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

Approx. 0.9 - 1.2V
K
Approx. 1.6 - 1.9V
L
2.5 - 3.5 msec

B/FUEL SCHDL

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

2,000 rpm

2.5 - 3.5 msec

A/F ALPHA-B1 A/F ALPHA-B2

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

54% - 155%

COOLAN TEMP/S q Engine: After warming up

More than 70°C (158°F)

HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V

HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2)

q Warm-up condition
q After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly.

0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V

HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

LEAN RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds

EC-119

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
VHCL SPEED SE BATTERY VOLT ACCEL SEN1 ACCEL SEN2* THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2* EVAP SYS PRES START SIGNAL CLSD THL POS
AIR COND SIG
P/N POSI SW
PW/ST SIGNAL
LOAD SIGNAL IGNITION SW HEATER FAN SW BRAKE SW
INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2
IGN TIMING
CAL/LD VALUE

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

q Warm-up condition

q After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly.

LEAN RICH

q Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the

indication.

speedometer indication

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

11 - 14V

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 4.0 - 4.7V

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.3 - 1.2V 3.9 - 4.8V

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

q Ignition switch: ON

Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V

q Ignition switch: ON START ON

OFF ON OFF

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine

Air conditioner switch: OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.)

OFF ON

q Ignition switch: ON

Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON

Shift lever: Except above

OFF

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine

Steering wheel is in neutral position. (Forward direction)
Steering wheel is turned.

OFF ON

q Ignition switch: ON

Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF.

ON OFF

q Ignition switch: ON OFF ON

ON OFF ON

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine

Heater fan is operating. Heater fan is not operating

ON OFF

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF ON

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

2.0 - 3.0 msec

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

2,000 rpm

1.9 - 2.9 msec

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

13° - 18° BTDC

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

2,000 rpm

25° - 45° BTDC

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

5% - 35%

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

2,500 rpm

5% - 35%

EC-120

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

MONITOR ITEM MASS AIRFLOW
PURG VOL C/V
INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2)
INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2)
AIR COND RLY
FUEL PUMP RLY VENT CONT/V THRTL RELAY
COOLING FAN
HO2S1 HTR (B1) HO2S1 HTR (B2)
HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2)
I/P PULLY SPD VEHICLE SPEED TRVL AFTER MIL O2SEN HTR DTY

q Engine: After warming up

CONDITION Idle

SPECIFICATION
A
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

2,500 rpm

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

2,000 rpm

q No-load

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

-5° - 5°CA

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly

Approx. 0° - 30°CA

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

0% - 2%

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly

Approx. 0% - 50%

q No-load

q Engine: After warming up, idle

Air conditioner switch: OFF

OFF

the engine

Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates)

q For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON

q Engine running or cranking

q Except above conditions q Ignition switch: ON

OFF

q Ignition switch: ON

Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less

OFF

q Engine: After warming up, idle

Engine coolant temperature is

the engine

between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C

LOW

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

(210°F)

Engine coolant temperature is 100°C (212°F) or more

q Engine: After warming up q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm

L
ON

q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

OFF

q Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.

Engine: After warming up

Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and

at idle for 1 minute under no load

q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

OFF

q Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12MPH)

Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication

q Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the

indication.

speedometer indication

q Ignition switch: ON

Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned ON.

0 - 65,535 km (0 - 40,723 mile)

q Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C (176°F) Approx. 40%
q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm

EC-121

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Approx. 0V

AC PRESS SEN

q Engine: Idle q Air conditioner switch: OFF

1.0 - 4.0V

VHCL SPEED SE

q Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the

indication.

speedometer indication

SET VHCL SPD

q Engine: Running

ASCD: Operating

The preset vehicle speed is displayed.

MAIN SW

q Ignition switch: ON

ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Released

ON OFF

CANCEL SW

q Ignition switch: ON

CANCEL switch: Pressed CANCEL switch: Released

ON OFF

RESUME/ACC SW q Ignition switch: ON

ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed ACCEL/RESUME switch: Released

ON OFF

SET SW

q Ignition switch: ON

COAST/SET switch: Pressed COAST/SET switch: Released

ON OFF

BRAKE SW1

q Ignition switch: ON

Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Fully released

Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF

BRAKE SW2

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF ON

CRUISE LAMP

q Ignition switch: ON

ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed at the 1st time at the 2nd time

ON OFF

SET LAMP

q ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: ON
q When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89MPH)

COAST/SET switch: Pressed COAST/SET switch: Released

ON OFF

*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal.

Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode

ABS00819

The following are the major sensor reference graphs in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for "CLSD THL POS", "ACCEL SEN 1" and "THRTL SEN 1" when depressing the accelerator pedal with the ignition switch ON and with shift lever in D (A/T), 1st (M/T) position. The signal of "ACCEL SEN 1" and "THRTL SEN 1" should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after "CLSD THL POS" is changed from "ON" to "OFF".

EC-122

PBIB0198E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1

Below is the data for "ENG SPEED", "MAS A/F SE-B1", "THRTL SEN 1", "HO2S2 (B1)", "HO2S1 (B1)" and A

"INJ PULSE-B1" when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine suffi-

ciently.

Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.

G
SEF241Y
H

EC-123

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

EC-124

PBIB0668E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Description

PFP:00031
A
ABS0081A

The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in "DATA MONI- EC TOR (SPEC)" mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more malfunctions. The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C MIL. The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:

q B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D rection)

q A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)

q MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)

Testing Condition

ABS0081B

q Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)

q Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)

q Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)

q Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)

q Transmission: Warmed-up*1

q Electrical load: Not applied*2

q Engine speed: Idle

*1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until "ATF

TEMP 1" (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).

For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.

*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight

ahead.

Inspection Procedure

ABS0081C

NOTE: Perform "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode in maximum scale display.

1. Perform EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .

2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.

3. Select "B/FUEL SCHDL", "A/F ALPHA-B1", "A/F ALPHA-B2"

and "MAS A/F SE-B1" in "DATA MONITOR (SPEC)" mode with

CONSULT-II.

4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.

5. If NG, go to EC-126, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF601Z

EC-125

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Diagnostic Procedure

ABS0081D

EC-126

SEF613ZD

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-127

SEF768Z

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE

EC-128

SEF615ZA

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Description

PFP:00006
A
ABS0081E

Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function

returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occur-

rences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may

not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the

specific malfunctioning area.

Common I/I Report Situations

STEP in Work Flow

Situation

The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].

III

The symptom described by the customer does not recur.

(1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.

The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

ABS0081F

Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA- G TION" .

>> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.

Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.

NG >> Repair or replace.

3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT

Perform GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , "INCIDENT SIMULATION

TESTS".

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair or replace.

4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS

Refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" , "HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS", "How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal".
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace connector.

EC-129

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram

PFP:24110
ABS0081G

EC-130

TBWT0640E

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

109 W/L

Ignition switch

[Ignition switch: OFF] [Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]

111 W

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

[Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition

0 - 1.5V

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

119 P 120 L

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

EC-131

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

EC-132

TBWT0641E

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

ECM ground

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

Body ground

115 B/R 116 B

ECM ground

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

Body ground

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

ABS0081H
E

Start engine.

Is engine running?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2. G
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.

K
MBIB0015E
L
M

EC-133

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F102, M72 q Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> Go to EC-583, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . NG >> GO TO 8.
EC-134

PBIB2192E PBIB1915E

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 18.
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 12.
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E7. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness or connectors E12, F3 q Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

A EC
C D
PBIB1630E
E F G H I
PBIB1191E
J K L M

EC-135

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E9. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13.
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness or connectors E11, F2 q Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK 15A FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R. 2. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace 15A fuse.
15. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
EC-136

PBIB2192E

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

16. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II A

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 18.

NG >> GO TO 17.

17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness or connectors F102, M72

q Harness for open or short between ECM and ground F

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness connectors.

18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

OK or NG

OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16 . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-137

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Ground Inspection

ABS00AML

Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:

q Remove the ground bolt or screw.

q Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. q Clean as required to assure good contact.

q Reinstall bolt or screw securely.

q Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.

q If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-29, "Ground Distribution" .

PBIB1870E

EC-138

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description

PFP:23710
A
ABS0081I

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-

tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other

control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2

communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.

Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS0081J

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

D
Possible cause

U1000*1

q ECM cannot communicate to other control

1000*1 U1001*2

CAN communication line

units. q ECM cannot communicate for more than the

q Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted)

1001*2

specified time.

*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. *2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure

G
ABS0081K

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-141, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-139

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Wiring Diagram

ABS0081L

EC-140

TBWT0255E

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Diagnostic Procedure
Go to LAN-2, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II"

ABS0081M
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-141

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Sensor

Input signal to ECM

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Wheel sensor*

Vehicle speed

*: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.

ECM function

PFP:23796
ABS0081N
Actuator

Intake valve

Intake valve timing control

timing control solenoid valve

PBIB1102E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS0081O

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

INT/V TIM (B1) INT/V TIM (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly

-5° - 5°CA Approx. 0° - 30°CA

INT/V SOL (B1) INT/V SOL (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly

0% - 2% Approx. 0% - 50%

EC-142

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL

On Board Diagnosis Logic

DTC No.
P0011 0011 (Bank 1)
P0021 0021 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name
Intake valve timing control performance

Detecting condition
There is a gap between angle of target and phase-control angle degree.

Possible cause

ABS0081P
A

EC
q Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

q Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

q Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up

portion of the camshaft

FAIL-SAFE MODE

When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.

Detected items Intake valve timing control

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Always drive at a safe speed.

ABS0081Q
F

NOTE: q If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P1111 or P1136, first perform trouble diagnosis for G
DTC P1111 or P1136. Refer to EC-403 .

q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait

at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at

idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with

CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-

ture.

3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive sec-

onds.

Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.

VHCL SPEED SE

100 - 120 km/h (63 - 75 MPH)

ENG SPEED COOLAN TEMP/S

2,000 - 4,000 rpm 60 - 120°C (140 - 248°F)

SEF353Z

B/FUEL SCHDL

More than 7.26 msec

Selector lever

A/T models: D position M/T models: 5th position

4. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.

ENG SPEED

1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLANT TEMPS

70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)

Selector lever

1st or 2nd position

Driving location uphill

Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.)

7. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-143

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-302, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
2. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-310, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
Check the following. q Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end q Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.

ABS0081R

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

SEC905C

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram, refer to EC-298 for CKP sensor (POS), EC-304 and EC-306 for CMP sensor (PHASE).

>> INSPECTION END

EC-144

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER

Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Sensor

Input signal to ECM

ECM function

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control

PFP:22690
A
ABS0081S

Actuator

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
C

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine is D
started.

OPERATION

Engine speed rpm

E
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater

Above 3,600

OFF

Below 3,600 after warming up

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS0081T

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

G
SPECIFICATION

HO2S1 HTR (B1) HO2S1 HTR (B2)

q Engine: After warming up q Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS0081U

DTC No.
P0031 0031 (Bank 1)
P0051 0051 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control circuit low

DTC detecting condition
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater.)

Possible cause
J

q Harness or connectors

(The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is

open or shorted.)

q Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater

P0032

The current amperage in the heated oxygen

0032 (Bank 1)
P0052 0052

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control circuit high

sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1

q Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.)
q Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater

(Bank 2)

heater.)

EC-145

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0081V

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-150, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-146

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

ABS0081W
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-147

TBWT0642E

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

Approximately 8V

24 G/B

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.

[Engine is running] q Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

PBIB0519E
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

EC-148

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-149

TBWT0643E

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

Approximately 8V

Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (bank 2)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.

[Engine is running] q Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

PBIB0519E
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
ABS0081X

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2192E

EC-150

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
2. CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A 1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 q 15A fuse q Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse

>> Repair harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC
P0031, P0032 P0051, P0052

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank
1 2

Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

D
PBIB1285E
E
F
G H
PBIB0969E
I J
K L
M

EC-151

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.

Terminal No.

Resistance

2 and 3

3.3 - 4.0 at 25°C (77°F)

1 and 2, 3, 4 4 and 1, 2, 3

(Continuity should not exist)

2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1.
CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

ABS0081Y

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

PBIB0970E ABS0081Z

EC-152

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PFP:226A0
A
ABS00820

Sensor Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine coolant temperature sensor

Input signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Engine speed

Engine coolant tempera-

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

ture

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

D The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,

amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.

OPERATION

Engine speed rpm

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

Above 3,600 Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.

OFF
F

q Engine: After warming up ON

q Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1

minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

ABS00821
H

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

q Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.

HO2S2 HTR (B1)

Engine: After warming up

HO2S2 HTR (B2)

Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and

at idle for 1 minute under no load

q Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

ABS00822

P0037

0037 (Bank 1)
P0057 0057

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit low

The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)

q Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is open or shorted.)
q Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater

(Bank 2)

P0038 0038 (Bank 1)
P0058 0058 (Bank 2)

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit high

The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)

q Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is shorted.)
q Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater

EC-153

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS00823

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF176Y

EC-154

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

ABS00824
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-155

TBWT0644E

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

25 P/B

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
Engine: after warming up
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

0 - 1.0V

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped [Engine is running] q Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

EC-156

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-157

TBWT0645E

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

BR/W

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2)

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running] q Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met. Engine: after warming up Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.
[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped [Engine is running] q Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.

0 - 1.0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

ABS00825

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1284E PBIB0969E

EC-158

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.

q Harness connectors M72, F102

q Fuse block (J/B) connector M4

q 15A fuse

q Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse C

>> Repair harness or connectors.

3. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0037, P0038

P0057, P0058

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

Refer to EC-160, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . M
>> INSPECTION END

EC-159

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER

Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.

Terminal No.

Resistance

2 and 3

5.0 - 7.0 at 25°C (77°F)

1 and 2, 3, 4 4 and 1, 2, 3

(Continuity should not exist)

2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

ABS00826

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

PBIB0970E ABS00827

EC-160

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.

PFP:22680
A
ABS00828
EC
C
D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW

CONDITION

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) 2,500 rpm q No-load

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

2,500 rpm

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

2,500 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

PBIB1604E
E
ABS00829

SPECIFICATION

Approx. 0.9 - 1.2V

Approx. 1.6 - 1.9V

5% - 35%

5% - 35%
I
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s

ABS0082A

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light load driving condition.

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

P0101 0101

Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance problem

q Mass air flow sensor

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or

A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition.

shorted.)

q Intake air leaks

q Mass air flow sensor

EC-161

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0082B

Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NOTE: If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead of running engine at idle speed.

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. 5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-165, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-165, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 3. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Check the voltage of "MAS A/F SE-B1" with "DATA MONITOR". 5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. 6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases. If NG, go to EC-165, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step.

SEF174Y

EC-162

SEF243Y

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive sec-

onds.

ENG SPEED

More than 2,000 rpm

THRTL SEN 1

More than 3V

THRTL SEN 2

More than 3V

Selector lever

Suitable position

Driving location

Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.

8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-165, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B

PBIB0199E
D
ABS0082C

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC E might not be confirmed.

With GST

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select "MODE 1" with GST.

3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with "MODE 1".

4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in

response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.

5. If NG, go to EC-165, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H

I
SEF534P
J

EC-163

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

ABS0082D

EC-164

TBWT0646E

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

0.9 - 1.2V

q Idle speed

51 OR

Mass air flow sensor

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

1.6 - 1.9V

q Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

[Engine is running]

67 B/W

Sensor ground

q Warm-up condition

Approximately 0V

111 W

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

q Idle speed
F
[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF]

0 - 1.5V

q For a few seconds after turning ignition

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V) tion switch OFF

119 P 120 L

Power supply for ECM

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

[Ignition switch: ON]

Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?

A or B

>> GO TO 3.

>> GO TO 2.

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

I
ABS0082E
J

2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection.

q Air duct

q Vacuum hoses

q Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts.

EC-165

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E12, F3 q Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor q Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
EC-166

PBIB2192E PBIB1077E PBIB1168E

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Refer to EC-168, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END L

EC-167

DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR

Component Inspection
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.

Condition

Voltage V

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

Approx. 0.4

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

0.9 - 1.2

2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

1.6 - 1.9

Idle to about 4,000 rpm*

0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. q Turn ignition switch OFF. q Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. q Perform steps 2 and 3 again.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust. 6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.

Removal and Installation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

ABS0082F PBIB1106E
ABS0082G

EC-168

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.

PFP:22680
A
ABS0082H
EC
C
D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

MAS A/F SE-B1

q Engine: After warming up q Air conditioner switch: OFF q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) q No-load

Idle 2,500 rpm

CAL/LD VALUE

q Engine: After warming up q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

Idle 2,500 rpm

MASS AIRFLOW

q Engine: After warming up q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

Idle 2,500 rpm

PBIB1604E
E
ABS0082I

SPECIFICATION

Approx. 0.9 - 1.2V

Approx. 1.6 - 1.9V

5% - 35%

5% - 35%
I
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s

On Board Diagnosis Logic
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

ABS0082J

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

P0102 Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

0102

circuit low input

sent to ECM.

q Intake air leaks

q Mass air flow sensor

P0103 0103

Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is

circuit high input

sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
q Mass air flow sensor

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Mass air flow sensor circuit

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

EC-169

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0082K

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Wait at least 5 seconds. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to next step. 5. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. 6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y SEF058Y

EC-170

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

ABS0082L
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-171

TBWT0646E

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

51 OR

Mass air flow sensor

67 B/W

Sensor ground

111 W

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

119 P 120 L

Power supply for ECM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,500 rpm. [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] q More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]

0.9 - 1.2V
1.6 - 1.9V
Approximately 0V
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

ABS0082M

Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated? P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2. P0103 >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection. q Air duct q Vacuum hoses q Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts.

EC-172

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
EC

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.

E
PBIB2192E
F G H

3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E12, F3 q Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor q Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.

J
PBIB1077E
K
L
M
PBIB1168E

EC-173

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-175, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END
EC-174

DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR

Condition

Voltage V

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

Approx. 0.4

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

0.9 - 1.2

2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

1.6 - 1.9

Idle to about 4,000 rpm*

0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4

Removal and Installation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

ABS0082N
A
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1106E
F
G H
ABS0082O
I J
K L
M

EC-175

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.

PFP:22630
ABS0082P

PBIB1604E

Intake air temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

25 (77)

3.32

1.94 - 2.06

80 (176)

1.23

0.295 - 0.349

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.

CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic

SEF012P ABS0082Q

DTC No.
P0112 0112
P0113 0113

Trouble diagnosis name
Intake air temperature sensor circuit low input
Intake air temperature sensor circuit high input

DTC detecting condition
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
q Intake air temperature sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0082R

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Wait at least 5 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-179, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

EC-176

SEF058Y

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR

WITH GST

Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

EC-177

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR

ABS0082S

EC-178

TBWT0263E

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

ABS0082T
A
EC

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is built-into) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

E
PBIB2192E
F
G
H
I

3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and ground.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connectors.

J
PBIB1077E
K
L
M

PBIB1169E
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-179

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR

4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-180, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 5 and
6 under the following conditions.

Intake air temperature °C (°F)

Resistance k

25 (77)

1.94 - 2.06

2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

ABS0082U PBIB1604E

Removal and Installation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

SEF012P ABS0082V

EC-180

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

PFP:22630
A
ABS0082W
EC
C

SEF594K
E

Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

-10 (14)

4.4

7.0 - 11.4

20 (68)

3.5

2.1 - 2.9

50 (122)

2.2

0.68 - 1.00

90 (194)

0.9

0.236 - 0.260

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.

H
SEF012P

CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

On Board Diagnosis Logic
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

ABS0082X

DTC No.

Trouble Diagnosis Name

DTC Detecting Condition

Possible Cause

P0117 0117

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit low input

An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

P0118 0118

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit high input

An excessively high voltage from the sensor is q Engine coolant temperature sensor sent to ECM.

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.

Condition

Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display)

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit

Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START

40°C (104°F) 80°C (176°F)

Except as shown above

40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time)

When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running.

EC-181

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0082Y

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Wait at least 5 seconds. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-184, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-182

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

ABS0082Z
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-183

TBWT0647E

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

ABS00830

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB2192E PBIB0993E PBIB0080E

EC-184

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-185, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)
20 (68)
50 (122)

Voltage* V
3.5 2.2

Resistance k 2.1 - 2.9
0.68 - 1.00

90 (194)

0.9

0.236 - 0.260

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Removal and Installation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-34, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .

A EC
C D E F G H
ABS00831
I J K L
PBIB2005E
M
SEF012P ABS00832

EC-185

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

PFP:16119

Component Description

ABS00833

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.

PBIB0145E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS00834

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2*

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS00835

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. P0122 0122
P0123 0123

Trouble diagnosis name Throttle position sensor 2 circuit low input
Throttle position sensor 2 circuit high input

DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
q Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 2)
q Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor.

EC-186

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS00836

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.

4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-189, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

F
SEF058Y
G
H

EC-187

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

ABS00837

EC-188

TBWB0072E

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

47 B

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

More than 0.36V

q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

q Accelerator pedal fully released

50 W

Throttle position sensor 1

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

Less than 4.75V

q Accelerator pedal fully depressed

66 W/R

Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V
G

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

Less than 4.75V

q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

q Accelerator pedal fully released

69 R/L

Throttle position sensor 2

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

More than 0.36V

q Accelerator pedal fully depressed

91 G

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

Approximately 5V

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

K
ABS00838
L

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
EC-189

PBIB2192E

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0995E

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

PBIB0082E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1

EC-188

APP sensor terminal 4

EC-563

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-567, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-190

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY A

1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.

2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

C >> INSPECTION END

7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist. F
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-192, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10.
M
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-191

DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.

Terminal

Accelerator pedal

Voltage

50 (Throttle position sensor 1)

Fully released Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

69 (Throttle position sensor 2)

Fully released Fully depressed

Less than 4.75V More than 0.36V

6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step.
7. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

ABS00839
PBIB1170E ABS0083A

EC-192

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR Component Description

PFP:22630
A
ABS0083B

NOTE:

If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or EC P0118. Refer to EC-181 .

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the

ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant

temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to

the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-

mistor decreases as temperature increases.

SEF594K
F

Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

-10 (14)

4.4

7.0 - 11.4

20 (68)

3.5

2.1 - 2.9

50 (122)

2.2

0.68 - 1.00

90 (194)

0.9

0.236 - 0.260

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.

I
SEF012P

CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- J age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

On Board Diagnosis Logic
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

ABS0083C
K

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not q Harness or connectors

P0125 0125

Insufficient engine coolant temperature for closed loop fuel control

practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine.
q Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for

(High resistance in the circuit) q Engine coolant temperature sensor

closed loop fuel control.

q Thermostat

EC-193

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0083D

CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check that "COOLAN TEMP/S" is above 10°C (50°F). If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK. If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. If "COOLAN TEMP/S" increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will be OK.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-194, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

SEF174Y ABS0083E

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-195, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
EC-194

PBIB2192E

DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR

3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION A

When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant does not flow.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-32, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY"

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Refer to EC-183, "Wiring Diagram" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

E
ABS0083F
F
G

Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)
20 (68)

Voltage* V 3.5

Resistance k 2.1 - 2.9

50 (122)

2.2

0.68 - 1.00

90 (194)

0.9

0.236 - 0.260

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Removal and Installation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-34, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .

I
PBIB2005E
J

K L

SEF012P

ABS0083G

EC-195

DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.

PFP:22630
ABS0083H

PBIB1604E

Intake air temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

25 (77)

3.32

1.94 - 2.06

80 (176)

1.23

0.295 - 0.349

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.

SEF012P ABS0083I

DTC No.
P0127 0127

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Intake air temperature too high

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant temperature sensor.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Intake air temperature sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0083J

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F) a. Turn ignition switch ON.

EC-196

DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR

b. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. c. Check the engine coolant temperature. d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine. q Perform the following steps before engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 90°C (194°F). 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Start engine. 5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 con-
secutive seconds. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-197, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

A
EC
C
SEF189Y
D
E
ABS0083K
F
G

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-180, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Refer to EC-178, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END

J
PBIB2192E
K
L
M

EC-197

DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR

Component Inspection
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.

Intake air temperature °C (°F)

Resistance k

25 (77)

1.94 - 2.06

2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

Removal and Installation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

ABS0083M

Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .

ABS0083L PBIB1604E SEF012P

EC-198

DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION

DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic

PFP:21200
A
ABS0083N

Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long

enough.

This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Thermostat

P0128 0128

Thermostat function

The engine coolant temperature does not reach to specified temperature even though

q Leakage from sealing portion of thermo-

the engine has run long enough.

stat

q Engine coolant temperature sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0083O

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

q For best results, perform at ambient temperature of 10°C (14°F) or higher.

q For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of 10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-32 . Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replace-

ment. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on.

2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Select "COOLAN TEMP/S" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Check that the "COOLAN TEMP/S" is above 60°C (140°F).

If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step.

If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.

5. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions.

VHCL SPEED SE

80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)

If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-199, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST 1. Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-200, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

K
L
ABS0083P
M

EC-199

DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
Component Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.

ABS0083Q

Engine coolant temperature °C (°F)
20 (68)

Voltage* V 3.5

Resistance k 2.1 - 2.9

50 (122)

2.2

0.68 - 1.00

90 (194)

0.9

0.236 - 0.260

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Removal and Installation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-34, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .

PBIB2005E
SEF012P ABS0083R

EC-200

DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V.

PFP:22690
A
ABS0083S
EC
C
D
SEF463R
E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxygen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.

H
SEF288D

ABS0083T

SPECIFICATION

0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 -

1.0V

LEAN RICH

Changes more than 5 times

during 10 seconds.

ABS0083U

SEF301UA

DTC No.
P0132 0132 (Bank 1)
P0152 0152 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit high voltage

An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Heated oxygen sensor 1

EC-201

DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0083V

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-206, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF174Y

EC-202

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1

ABS0083W
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-203

TBWT0649E

DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

35 W/B

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

EC-204

DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-205

TBWT0650E

DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

16 LG

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2)

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
Approximately 0V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

ABS0083X

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1.

Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1284E

EC-206

DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.

PBIB1285E

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0132

P0152

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0132

P0152

Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-207

DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. 3. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-209, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END
EC-208

DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1

Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

ABS0083Y
A

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "MANU TRIG" and adjust "TRIGGER POINT" to 100% in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT- EC
II.

3. Select "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" and "HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)".

4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.

5. Touch "RECORD" on CONSULT-II screen.

6. Check the following.
q "HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)" in "DATA MONITOR" mode changes from "RICH" to "LEAN" to "RICH" 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

F
SEF646Y
G H
I
J
SEF647Y
K

M
SEF648Y
CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

EC-209

DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and ground.

3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.

q The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds.

q The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

q The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

q The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

1 time: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 -

0.3V

PBIB1107E

CAUTION:

q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m

(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

ABS0083Z

EC-210

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V.

PFP:22690
A
ABS00840
EC
C
D
SEF463R
E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (heated oxygen sensor 1 cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.

H
SEF288D

ABS00841

SPECIFICATION

0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 -

1.0V

LEAN RICH

Changes more than 5 times

during 10 seconds.

ABS00842

SEF010V

EC-211

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1

DTC No.
P0133 0133 (Bank 1)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P0153 0153 (Bank 2)

Heated oxygen sensor The response of the voltage signal from the 1 circuit slow response sensor takes more than the specified time.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Heated oxygen sensor 1 q Fuel pressure q Injectors q Intake air leaks q Exhaust gas leaks q PCV valve q Mass air flow sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS00843

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
q Always perform at a temperature above -10°C (14°F). q Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "HO2S1 (B1) P0133" or "HO2S1 (B2) P0153" of "HO2S1" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Touch "START".
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE: Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.

6. When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take approximately 20 to 50 seconds.)

ENG SPEED Vehicle speed B/FUEL SCHDL Selector lever

1,200 - 3,100 rpm More than 80 km/h (50 MPH) 2.5 - 12.0 msec Suitable position

If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.

SEF338Z SEF339Z

EC-212

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1

7. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG

RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-217, "Diagnostic

Procedure" .

Overall Function Check

SEF658Y
D
ABS00844

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st

trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1(B2) signal] and F
ground.

3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-

stant under no load.

The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds.

H 1 time: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V

0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V

times: 0 - 0.3V

4. If NG, go to EC-217, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB1107E
J

EC-213

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1

ABS00845

EC-214

TBWT0649E

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

35 W/B 78 B/Y

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1)
Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

C
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
D
Approximately 0V
E

EC-215

BANK 2

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1

EC-216

TBWT0650E

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

16 LG 78 B/Y

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2)
Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
Approximately 0V

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

C
D
E
ABS00846
F

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.

PBIB2192E

Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3.
EC-217

PBIB1284E

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
3. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace.

PBIB1165E

EC-218

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1

5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR".

4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?

Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF968Y

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.

3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart

and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-

nector.

5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.

6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE

EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.

8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?

J
PBIB1077E

Yes or No

Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or DTC P0172, P0175 (Refer to EC-254 or EC-

262 ).

No >> GO TO 6. L

EC-219

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
6. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC
P0133 P0153

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank
1 2

Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC
P0133 P0153

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank
1 2

Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB1285E

EC-220

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1

8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A

Refer to EC-175, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

9. CHECK PCV VALVE

Refer to EC-647, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10.

NG >> Replace PCV valve.

10. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EC-221, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.

11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

ABS00847

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select "MANU TRIG" and adjust "TRIGGER POINT" to 100% in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULTII.

3. Select "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" and "HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)".

4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.

5. Touch "RECORD" on CONSULT-II screen. L

SEF646Y

EC-221

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
6. Check the following. q "HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)" in "DATA MONITOR" mode changes from "RICH" to "LEAN" to "RICH" 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

SEF647Y

SEF648Y
CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

EC-222

DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and

ground.

3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-

stant under no load.

q The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V

more than 5 times within 10 seconds.

q The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

q The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

q The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

1 time: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 0.3V

E
PBIB1107E

CAUTION:

q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7

in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

G
ABS00848

Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . H

EC-223

DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V.

PFP:22690
ABS00849
SEF463R

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks that this time is not inordinately long.

SEF288D
ABS0084A
SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V LEAN RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
ABS0084B

DTC No.
P0134 0134 (Bank 1)
P0154 0154 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit no activity detected

The voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. 0.3V.

EC-224

SEF237U
Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Heated oxygen sensor 1

DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

ABS0084C
A

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "HO2S1 (B1) P0134" or "HO2S1 (B2) P0154" of "HO2S1" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with D
CONSULT-II.

3. Touch "START". E
4. Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.

NOTE:

Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If

the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4.

5. When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.)

ENG SPEED Vehicle speed B/FUEL SCHDL Selector lever

1,400 - 2,600 rpm More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) 2.0 - 12.0 msec Suitable position

If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
6. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-230, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB0544E

K
PBIB0545E
L

SEC750C

EC-225

DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1

Overall Function Check

ABS0084D

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4V.
4. If NG, go to EC-230, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB1107E

EC-226

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1

ABS0084E
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-227

TBWT0649E

DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

35 W/B

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

EC-228

DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-229

TBWT0650E

DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

16 LG

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2)

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodically change)
Approximately 0V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS0084F

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2192E

EC-230

DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
EC

3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.

PBIB1285E

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0134

P0154

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Terminals

DTC

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0134

P0154

Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-232, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.

EC-231

DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

ABS0084G

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select "MANU TRIG" and adjust "TRIGGER POINT" to 100% in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULTII.

3. Select "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" and "HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)".

4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.

5. Touch "RECORD" on CONSULT-II screen.

SEF646Y SEF647Y

SEF648Y
CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
EC-232

DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1

2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and

ground.

3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.

q The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V

more than 5 times within 10 seconds.

q The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

q The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

q The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

1 time: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 -

0.3V

PBIB1107E

CAUTION:

q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E

in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread

Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

ABS0084H
G

EC-233

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.

PFP:226A0
ABS0084I

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

SEF327R ABS0084J

MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2)

CONDITION

q Warm-up condition

q After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly.

SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN RICH

On Board Diagnosis Logic
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel cut.

ABS0084K

SEF305UA

DTC No.
P0138 0138 (Bank 1)
P0158 0158 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit high voltage

An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Heated oxygen sensor 2

EC-234

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

ABS0084L
A

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-239, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

C
D
E
F
SEF174Y

WITH GST

Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

EC-235

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

ABS0084M

EC-236

TBWT0651E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

74 L/B

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)

quickly after the following conditions are met.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V
F

EC-237

BANK 2

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

EC-238

TBWT0652E

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

55 R/Y

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)

quickly after the following conditions are met.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V
F

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS0084N
G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

K
PBIB2192E
L
M

EC-239

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC
P0138 P0158

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank
1 2

Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC
P0138 P0158

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank
1 2

Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB1284E

EC-240

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. 3. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-241, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
EC-241

A EC
C D E F G H
ABS0084O
I J K L
SEF174Y
M
SEF662Y

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.

PBIB0796E
"HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" should be above 0.63V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" is +25%. "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" should be below 0.48V at least once when the "FUEL INJECTION" is -25%.
CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground.

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary.

7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D (A/T), 4th (M/T) gear position. The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this procedure.

PBIB1607E

8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

ABS0084P

EC-242

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.

PFP:226A0
A
ABS0084Q
EC
C
D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

SEF327R
E
ABS0084R

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

HO2S2 (B1)

q Warm-up condition

0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 -

HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2)

q After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly.

1.0V LEAN RICH

On Board Diagnosis Logic

H
ABS0084S

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer

switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor

2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's

voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition

such as fuel-cut.

SEF302U
L

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0139 0139

q Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

(Bank 1)

Heated oxygen sensor It takes more time for the sensor to respond

q Heated oxygen sensor 2

P0159

2 circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time. q Fuel pressure

0159

q Injectors

(Bank 2)

q Intake air leaks

EC-243

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0084T

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

6. Make sure that "COOLAN TEMP/S" indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when "COOLAN
TEMP/S" indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).

SEF174Y

7. Select "HO2S2 (B1) P0139" or "HO2S2 (B2) P0159" of "HO2S2" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

8. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.

9. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If "CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED" is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.

PBIB0115E

Overall Function Check

ABS0084U

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.

EC-244

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

A EC
C
PBIB1607E
D E F G H I J K L M

EC-245

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

ABS0084V

EC-246

TBWT0651E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

74 L/B

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)

quickly after the following conditions are met.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V
F

EC-247

BANK 2

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

EC-248

TBWT0652E

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

55 R/Y

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)

quickly after the following conditions are met.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V
F

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS0084W
G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

K
PBIB2192E
L
M

EC-249

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode
with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR". 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?

SEF968Y

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.

3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.

5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.

6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.

8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?

PBIB1077E

Yes or No

Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-254 or EC-262 . No >> GO TO 3.

EC-250

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

PBIB1284E
F

Continuity should exist.

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC

Terminals

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0139

P0159

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC

Terminals

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P0139

P0159

Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-251

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-252, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

ABS0084X SEF174Y

7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.

SEF662Y

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread

Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and

ground.

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times.

(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)

The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this

procedure.

If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-

sary.

7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this procedure.

PBIB1607E

8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

CAUTION:

q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7

in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread

Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

ABS0084Y
J

EC-253

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

PFP:16600

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS0084Z

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).

Sensor

Input signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Heated oxygen sensors 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Fuel injection control

Fuel injector

DTC No.
P0171 0171 (Bank 1)

Trouble diagnosis name

P0174 0174 (Bank 2)

Fuel injection system too lean

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
q The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)

q Intake air leaks q Heated oxygen sensor 1 q Injector q Exhaust gas leaks q Incorrect fuel pressure q Lack of fuel q Mass air flow sensor q Incorrect PCV hose connection

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS00850

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR".

5. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.

8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.

SEF968Y

EC-254

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

WITH GST

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then

restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-

nector.

5. Select "MODE 3" with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.

6. Select "MODE 4" with GST and erase the DTC P0102.

7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8. Select "MODE 7" with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.

D
PBIB1077E
E

10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.

EC-255

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

ABS00851

EC-256

TBWT0653E

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-257

TBWT0654E

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.

ABS00852

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. 2. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.

PBIB1165E

EC-258

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector.

3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank

P0171

P0174

Continuity should exist.

5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F

DTC

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank

P0171

P0174

Continuity should not exist.

6. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.

Continuity should exist.

7. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .

2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .

At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. q Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-601 .) q Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-45 .) q Fuel lines q Fuel filter for clogging

>> Repair or replace.

EC-259

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check "MASS AIR FLOW" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-161, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.

Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.

PBIB0133E

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-595, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
EC-260

PBIB1986E

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
8. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. 4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-38, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 5. For DTC P0171, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2. 6. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 7. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector. 8. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel splays out from injectors on bank 1. For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel splays out from injectors on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

A EC
C D E F G
PBIB1726E
H I J

EC-261

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

PFP:16600

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS00853

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).

Sensor

Input signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Heated oxygen sensors 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Fuel injection control

Fuel injector

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0172 0172 (Bank 1)
P0175 0175 (Bank 2)

Fuel injection system too rich

q Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
q The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.)

q Heated oxygen sensor 1 q Injector q Exhaust gas leaks q Incorrect fuel pressure q Mass air flow sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS00854

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR".

5. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.

8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.

SEF968Y

EC-262

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

WITH GST

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then

restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-

nector.

5. Select "MODE 3" with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.

6. Select "MODE 4" with GST and erase the DTC P0102.

7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8. Select "MODE 7" with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.

D
PBIB1077E
E

10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and F
check for fouling, etc.

EC-263

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

ABS00855

EC-264

TBWT0653E

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-265

TBWT0654E

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle. 2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.

ABS00856

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.

PBIB1165E

EC-266

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector.

3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank

P0172

P0175

Continuity should exist.

5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F

DTC

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank

P0172

P0175

Continuity should not exist.

6. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.

Continuity should exist.

7. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .

2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .

At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. q Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-601 .) q Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-45 .)

>> Repair or replace.

EC-267

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check "MASS AIR FLOW" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-161, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.

Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.

PBIB0133E

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-595, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
EC-268

PBIB1986E

DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

8. CHECK INJECTOR A

1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-38, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.

2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.

3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.

4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.

5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.

6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.

Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.

OK or NG

OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
E
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END G

EC-269

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

PFP:22630
ABS00857

PBIB0994E

Fluid temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

20 (68)

3.5

2.3 - 2.7

50 (122)

2.2

0.79 - 0.90

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.

SEF012P ABS00858

DTC No.
P0181 0181

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit range/ performance

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor and intake air temperature sensor.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Fuel tank temperature sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS00859

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 10 seconds. If the result is NG, go to EC-273, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the result is OK, go to following step.
4. Check "COOLAN TEMP/S" value. If "COOLAN TEMP/S" is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK. If "COOLAN TEMP/S" is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step.
5. Cool engine down until "COOLAN TEMP/S" is less than 60°C (140°F).
6. Wait at least 10 seconds.
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-273, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF174Y

EC-270

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR

WITH GST

Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

EC-271

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR

ABS0085A

EC-272

TBWT0455E

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

ABS0085B
A
EC

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

E
PBIB2192E
F
G
H
I

3. Check voltage between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

J
PBIB0994E
K
L
M

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness connectors B1, M12 q Harness for open or short between ECM and "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump"
>> Repair harness or connector.

PBIB0932E

EC-273

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR

4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check harness continuity between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminal 5 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B1, M12 q Harness for open or short between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" and ground.

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure.

Temperature °C (°F) 20 (68) 50 (122)

Resistance k 2.3 - 2.7
0.79 - 0.90

ABS0085C

Removal and Installation
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

PBIB0931E ABS0085D

EC-274

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

PFP:22630
A
ABS0085E
EC
C

PBIB0994E
E

Fluid temperature °C (°F)

Voltage* V

Resistance k

20 (68)

3.5

2.3 - 2.7

50 (122)

2.2

0.79 - 0.90

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.

F
G
H
SEF012P
I
ABS0085F

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0182 0182
P0183 0183

Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is

sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is q Fuel tank temperature sensor

sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0085G

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Wait at least 5 seconds.

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-277, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
EC-275

SEF174Y

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR

ABS0085H

EC-276

TBWT0455E

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

ABS0085I
A
EC

E
PBIB2192E
F
G
H
I

3. Check voltage between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

J
PBIB0994E
K
L
M

PBIB0932E

EC-277

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR

Temperature °C (°F) 20 (68) 50 (122)

Resistance k 2.3 - 2.7
0.79 - 0.90

ABS0085J

Removal and Installation
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

PBIB0931E ABS0085K

EC-278

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Component Description

PFP:16119
A
ABS0085L

EC
C
D
PBIB0145E
E
ABS0085M

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

F
SPECIFICATION

q Ignition switch: ON

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

More than 0.36V

THRTL SEN1

(Engine stopped)

THRTL SEN2*

q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

Less than 4.75V

*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

H
ABS0085N

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0222 0222

Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor q Harness or connectors

1 circuit low input

1 is sent to ECM.

(TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)

(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)

q Electric throttle control actuator

P0223

Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sen-

(TP sensor 1)

0223

1 circuit high input

sor 1 is sent to ECM.

q Accelerator pedal position sensor

(APP sensor 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE

When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode an the MIL lights up.

Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
M
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

EC-279

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0085O

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-282, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-280

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

ABS0085P
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-281

TBWB0073E

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

47 B

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

50 W

Throttle position sensor 1

66 W/R

Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor)

69 R/L

Throttle position sensor 2

91 G

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) q Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) q Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) q Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) q Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V More than 0.36V
Less than 4.75V Approximately 0V Less than 4.75V
More than 0.36V Approximately 5V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS0085Q

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
EC-282

PBIB2192E

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.
EC

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3.

D
PBIB0995E
E
F
G

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

PBIB0082E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair or replace open circuit.

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. M

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1

EC-281

APP sensor terminal 4

EC-563

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-567, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-283

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-285, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-284

DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D (A/T), 1st (M/T) position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.

Terminal

Accelerator pedal

Voltage

50 (Throttle position sensor 1)

Fully released Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

69 (Throttle position sensor 2)

Fully released Fully depressed

Less than 4.75V More than 0.36V

6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step.
7. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

ABS0085R
A

PBIB1170E

G
ABS0085S
H

EC-285

DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE

DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-

FIRE

PFP:00000

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS0085T

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.

Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Input Signal to ECM Engine speed

ECM function On board diagnosis of misfire

The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink. When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.

DTC No.
P0300 0300
P0301 0301
P0302 0302
P0303 0303
P0304 0304
P0305 0305
P0306 0306

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Multiple cylinder misfire detected

Multiple cylinder misfire.

No.1 cylinder misfire detected

No. 1 cylinder misfires.

No. 2 cylinder misfire detected

No. 2 cylinder misfires.

No. 3 cylinder misfire detected

No. 3 cylinder misfires.

No. 4 cylinder misfire detected

No. 4 cylinder misfires.

No. 5 cylinder misfire detected

No. 5 cylinder misfires.

No. 6 cylinder misfire detected

No. 6 cylinder misfires.

Possible cause
q Improper spark plug q Insufficient compression q Incorrect fuel pressure q The injector circuit is open or shorted q Fuel injector q Intake air leak q The ignition signal circuit is open or
shorted q Lack of fuel q Signal plate q Heated oxygen sensor 1 q Incorrect PCV hose connection

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0085U

EC-286

DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select "DATA MONITOR" mode

with CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.

5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-287, "Diagnostic Procedure"

NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

D
PBIB0164E

2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain

time. Refer to the table below.

Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.

The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con- F ditions should be satisfied at the same time.

Engine speed

Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm

Vehicle speed

Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)

When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),

Engine coolant temperature

T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).

(T) condition

When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),

T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).

The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.

Engine speed Around 1,000 rpm Around 2,000 rpm More than 3,000 rpm

Time Approximately 10 minutes Approximately 5 minutes Approximately 3.5 minutes

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. 2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. 3. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING

J
K
L
ABS0085V
M

Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace it.

EC-287

DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-II 1. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. 2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?

Without CONSULT-II When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?

PBIB0133E

Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 7.
4. CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-595,
"INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .

PBIB0997E PBIB1986E

EC-288

DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE

5. CHECK IGNITION SPARK A

1. Remove ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.

2. Remove spark plug from ignition coil assembly

3. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil.

4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.

5. Check for spark. C
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-583, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .

6. CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type
one(s). For spark plug type, refer to, MA-17, "Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)" .

SEF575Q

G H

7. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-92, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .

Standard:

1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2 , 185 psi)/300 rpm

Minimum:

981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2 , 142 psi)/300 rpm

Difference between each cylinder:

98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/300 rpm

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

8. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

SEF156I

1. Install all removed parts. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .

At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.

EC-289

DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-601, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) q Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) q Fuel lines q Fuel filter for clogging

>> Repair or replace.
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

Check the following items. Refer to EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .

Items

Specifications

Target idle speed

A/T

650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

M/T

650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)

Ignition timing

A/T

15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)

M/T

15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Follow the EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .

11. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)

Refer to EC-209, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
12. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-II Check mass air flow sensor signal in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or grounds. Refer to EC-161, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
13. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-82, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair or replace.

EC-290

DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE

14. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC A

Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.

Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE

EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .

>> GO TO 15.

15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D

>> INSPECTION END E

EC-291

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
DTC P0327, P0328 KS Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.

PFP:22060
ABS0085W

On Board Diagnosis Logic
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.

PBIB0998E ABS0085X

DTC No.
P0327 0327 P0328 0328

Trouble diagnosis name
Knock sensor circuit low input
Knock sensor circuit high input

DTC detected condition
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
q Knock sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0085Y

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-294, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-292

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0327, P0328 KS

ABS0085Z
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-293

TBWT0656E

DTC P0327, P0328 KS

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

15 W

Knock sensor

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.5V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

ABS00860

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 k [at 20°C (68°F)]
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

PBIB0998E

Check the following. q Harness connectors F37, F229 q Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EC-296, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace knock sensor.

EC-294

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
5. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS A Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
EC

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

PBIB2192E
E
F

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors F37, F229

q Harness connectors F102, M72

q Harness for open or short between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground L

>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-295

DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Component Inspection
KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 k [at 20°C (68°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
Removal and Installation
KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EM-110, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .

ABS00861
SEF111Y ABS00862

EC-296

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description

PFP:23731
A
ABS00863

The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

EC
C
D
PBIB0562E
E
ABS00864

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

F
SPECIFICATION

ENG SPEED

q Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the

tion.

tachometer indication.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS00865

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal

is not detected by the ECM during the first

few seconds of engine cranking.

q Harness or connectors

P0335 0335

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit

q The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM

q Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

while the engine is running.

q The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal q Signal plate

is not in the normal pattern during engine

running.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

K
ABS00866

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-299, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
EC-297

SEF058Y

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

ABS00867

EC-298

TBWT0657E

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

[Engine is running]

Approximately 1.2V

q Warm-up condition
D
q Idle speed

NOTE:

The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at

idle.

13 BR

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

PBIB1041E
Approximately 1.1V
F

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1042E
H
ABS00868
I
J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

M
PBIB2192E

EC-299

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB1279E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E12, F3 q Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM q Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R

PBIB0664E

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F102, M72 q Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-300

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EC-302, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

G Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Replace the signal plate.

9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-301

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Inspection
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

ABS00869

5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Terminal No. (Polarity) 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) 2 (+) - 3 (-)

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Except 0 or

Removal and Installation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EM-29, "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER" .

PBIB0563E
PBIB0564E ABS0086A

EC-302

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.

PFP:23731
A
ABS0086B
EC
C
D
PBIB0562E
E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

ABS00950
F

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

ENG SPEED

q Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the

tion.

tachometer indication.

On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

ABS0086C
H

P0340 0340 (Bank 1)

q The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM q Harness or connectors

for the first few seconds during engine

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

cranking.

q Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

P0345 0345

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit

q The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM

during engine running.

q Camshaft (Intake) q Starter motor (Refer to SC-9 .)

(Bank 2)

q The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal q Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-9 .)

pattern during engine running.

q Dead (Weak) battery

DTC Confirmation Procedure

K
ABS0086D

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-

tion switch ON.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-307, "Diagnostic Procedure"
. If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. 5. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-307, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-303

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

ABS0086E

EC-304

TBWT0658E

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

[Engine is running]

1.0 - 4.0V

q Warm-up condition
D
q Idle speed

NOTE:

The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at

idle.

33 OR

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 1)

1.0 - 4.0V

PBIB1039E
F

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

PBIB1040E
H
I

EC-305

BANK 2

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

EC-306

TBWT0659E

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

[Engine is running]

1.0 - 4.0V

q Warm-up condition
D
q Idle speed

NOTE:

The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at

idle.

14 Y

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2)

1.0 - 4.0V

PBIB1039E
F

[Engine is running]

q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to START position. Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1040E
H
ABS0086F
I
J
K
L
M

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
EC-307

PBIB2192E

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB1000E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E12, F3 q Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM q Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R

SEF481Y

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F102, M72 q Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-308

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)

7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 or 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EC-310, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).

9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)

G Check the following.

q Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end

q Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10.

NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft

rear end or replace camshaft.

10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

SEC905C
K
L
M

EC-309

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Inspection
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.

ABS0086G

5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Terminal No. (Polarity) 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) 2 (+) - 3 (-)

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Except 0 or

Removal and Installation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EM-76, "CAMSHAFT" .

PBIB0563E
PBIB0564E ABS0086H

EC-310

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2.

PFP:20905
A
ABS0086I
EC

PBIB1166E

A three way catalyst 1 with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxy-

gen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will

increase. When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way F

catalyst 1 malfunction is diagnosed.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

G
Possible cause

P0420 0420 (Bank 1)
P0430 0430 (Bank 2)

Catalyst system efficiency below threshold

q Three way catalyst 1 does not operate properly.
q Three way catalyst 1 does not have enough oxygen storage capacity.

q Three way catalyst 1 q Exhaust tube q Intake air leaks q Fuel injector q Fuel injector leaks q Spark plug q Improper ignition timing

DTC Confirmation Procedure

H
I
J
ABS0086J

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at K least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION: Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that "COOLAN TEMP/S" indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when "COOLAN TEMP/S" indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.

L M
SEF189Y

EC-311

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
8. Select "DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION" then "SRT WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely. If "INCMP" of "CATALYST" changed to "CMPLT", go to step 12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.

11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until "INCMP" of "CATALYST" changes to "CMPLT" (It will take
approximately 5 minutes). If not "CMPLT", stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1.

SEF940Z

12. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II.
13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-313, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF941Z

SEF535Z

Overall Function Check

ABS0086K

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst 1. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
3. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
4. Open engine hood.
5. Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 35 [HO2S1 (bank 1) signal], 16 [HO2S1 (bank 2) signal] and ground, and ECM terminals 74 [HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground.
6. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.

EC-312

PBIB1107E

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION

7. Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)

between ECM terminals 74 and ground, or 55 and ground is

very less than that of ECM terminals 35 and ground, or 16 and

ground.

Switching frequency ratio = A/B A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 voltage switching frequency

B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 voltage switching frequency

This ratio should be less than 0.75.

If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst 1

does not operate properly. Go to EC-313, "Diagnostic Proce-

dure" .

PBIB1108E

NOTE:

If the voltage at terminal 35 or 16 does not switch periodically more than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 7,

perform trouble diagnosis for "DTC P0133, P0153" first. (See EC-211 .)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

ABS0086L

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 2.

NG >> Repair or replace.

2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst 1.

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace.

K
PBIB1165E
L
M

EC-313

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION

4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

Check the following items. Refer to EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .

Items

Specifications

Target idle speed

A/T

650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

M/T

650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)

Ignition timing

A/T

15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)

M/T

15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .

5. CHECK INJECTORS

1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-596 .
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform EC-598, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

6. CHECK IGNITION SPARK
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover. 3. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly. 4. Disconnect injector harness connectors. 5. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine. 6. Check for spark. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit.
Refer to EC-583, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .

PBIB1172E

SEF575Q

EC-314

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION

7. CHECK INJECTOR A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Remove injector assembly.

Refer to EM-38, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .

Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.

3. Reconnect all injector harness connectors.

4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.

5. Turn ignition switch ON.

Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.

OK or NG

OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8.

NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.

8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F

Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly.

EC-315

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

PFP:14950

System Description

ABS0086M

NOTE: If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform trouble diagnosis for other DTC.

PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS0086N

Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.

DTC No.
P0441 0441

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck closed

q EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit

EVAP control system incorrect purge flow

EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor.

q Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube
q Blocked rubber tube q Cracked EVAP canister q EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve circuit

q Accelerator pedal position sensor

q Blocked purge port

q EVAP canister vent control valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0086O

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.

EC-316

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. 4. Select "PURG FLOW P0441" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC CONFIRMATION" mode with CON- EC
SULT-II.

5. Touch "START".

If "COMPLETED" is displayed, go to step 7.

6. When the following conditions are met, "TESTING" will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain

the conditions continuously until "TESTING" changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take at least 35 seconds.)

Selector lever

Suitable position

Vehicle speed

32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)

ENG SPEED

500 - 3,000 rpm

B/FUEL SCHDL

1.3 - 9.0 msec

Engine coolant temperature

70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)

PBIB0826E
If "TESTING" is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2. 7. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC- J
318, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Overall Function Check

ABS0086P
K

Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.

During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST

1. Lift up drive wheels.

2. Start engine (VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.

5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground.

6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed and note it.

7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute.

Air conditioner switch

Headlamp switch

Rear window defogger switch Engine speed

ON Approx. 3,000 rpm

PBIB1109E

Gear position

Any position other than P, N or R

8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second.

EC-317

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

9. If NG, go to EC-318, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

ABS0086Q

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check EVAP canister for cracks. OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
2. CHECK PURGE FLOW

With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Select "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch "Qd" and "Qu" on CONSULT-II screen to adjust "PURG VOL CONT/V" opening and check vacuum existence.

PURG VOL CONT/V 100% 0%
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4.
3. CHECK PURGE FLOW

Vacuum Should exist. Should not exist.

PBIB0147E

Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Stop engine. 3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . 4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. 5. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist.
6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle.
Vacuum should not exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4.

EC-318

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair it.
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
3. Check that air flows freely. OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
EC-319

G
SEF367U
H

SEF368U

PBIB0147E

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-348 , P0453 EC-354 . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace it.
13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-320

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic

PFP:14950
A
ABS0086R

This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.

If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister EC purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following "Vacuum test" conditions.

The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-

ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold

vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.

PBIB1026E

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve

q Incorrect fuel filler cap used

q Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.

q Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.

q Leak is in line between intake manifold and

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve.

q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent

control valve.

P0442 0442

q EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
M
q EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks

EVAP control system small leak detected (negative pressure)

EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly.

q EVAP purge line rubber tube bent q Loose or disconnected rubber tube q EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit

q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit

q Fuel tank temperature sensor
q O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged

q Water separator q EVAP canister is saturated with water

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

q Fuel level sensor and the circuit q Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve

q ORVR system leaks

EC-321

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTION: q Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
q If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
q Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0086S

NOTE: q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
q Perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface.
q Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5. Select "EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed.

PBIB0829E
NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
6. Make sure that "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-323, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly.

WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-57 before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to EC-57, "Driving Pattern" .
EC-322

SEC763C

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
3. Stop vehicle. 4. Select "MODE 1" with GST. q If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. q If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving. 7. Drive vehicle again according to EC-57, "Driving Pattern" . 8. Stop vehicle. 9. Select "MODE 3" with GST. q If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-323, "Diagnostic Procedure" . q If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-318 . q If P0441 and P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step. 10. Select "MODE 1" with GST. q If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. q If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-637, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
EC-323

F
ABS0086T
G
H

I J

SEF915U

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .

PBIB1001E

SEF916U
NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.

EC-324

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" of "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "START" and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace.

A EC
C D E
PEF917U
F G H I
SEF200U
J K L M

EC-325

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)

PBIB1002E
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace.

8. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-329, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace water separator.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following. q EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-638, "Removal and Installation" . q EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.

SEF200U

EC-326

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached.

2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 11.

No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.

No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

PBIB1031E

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor F

attached.

The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).

OK or NG

OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.

OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

NG >> GO TO 12.

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q EVAP canister for damage

q EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

With CONSULT-II

1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.

2. Start engine.

3. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.

4. Touch "Qu" on CONSULT-II screen to increase "PURG VOL

CONT/V" opening to 100%.

5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.

PBIB0147E

EC-327

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Stop engine. 3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
16. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
17. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
18. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
19. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
20. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 21.
EC-328

DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

21. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A

Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-641, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

22. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE

Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and

improper connection.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 23.

NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.

23. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

F Refer to EC-645, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 24.

NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

24. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H

Refer to DI-15, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 25.

NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

25. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
WATER SEPARATOR 1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. 2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. 3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. 4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with
A , and then C plugged. 5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE: q Do not disassemble water separator.

K
ABS008GD
L
M

PBIB1032E

EC-329

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID

VALVE

PFP:14920

Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

ABS0086U

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*1

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Battery Throttle position sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor

Battery voltage*1 Throttle position Accelerator pedal position

EVAP canister

EVAP canister purge vol-

purge flow control ume control solenoid valve

Heated oxygen sensor 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal)

Fuel tank temperature sensor

Fuel temperature in fuel tank

Wheel sensor*2

Vehicle speed

*1:ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

PURG VOL C/V

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

2,000 rpm

q No-load

SEF337U ABS0086V
SPECIFICATION 0% --

EC-330

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

On Board Diagnosis Logic

DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

ABS0086W
A

P0444 0444
P0445 0445

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit open
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit shorted

q Harness or connectors

An excessively low voltage signal is sent

(The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)

to ECM through the valve

q EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve
C
q Harness or connectors

An excessively high voltage signal is sent (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)

to ECM through the valve

q EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0086X

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure"

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

J
SEF058Y
K
L

EC-331

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram

ABS0086Y

EC-332

TBWT0660E

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

D
[Engine is running]
q Idle speed

45 L/W

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

SEC990C

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]
G
q Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine).

111 W
119 P 120 L

ECM relay (Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM

SEC991C

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF]

0 - 1.5V

q For a few seconds after turning ignition

switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
L

EC-333

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure

ABS0086Z

1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-

CUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB1001E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

PBIB0148E

Check the following. q Harness connectors E12, F3 q Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R q Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-334

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A

With CONSULT-II

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.

2. Start engine.

3. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with

CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the

valve opening.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value)
100%
0%

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

E
PBIB0147E
F

G H

ABS00870

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

Condition
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No supply

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

EC-335

PBIB0149E PBIB0150E

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Removal and Installation
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

ABS00871

EC-336

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP Control System diagnosis.

PFP:14935
A
ABS00872
EC
C
D
SEF381Z
E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V

q Ignition switch: ON

CONDITION

On Board Diagnosis Logic

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P0447 0447

EVAP canister vent con- An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM trol valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve.

H
PBIB1002E

ABS00873

SPECIFICATION

OFF

ABS00874

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)

q EVAP canister vent control valve

EC-337

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS00875

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-340, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-338

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Wiring Diagram

ABS00876
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-339

TBWT0661E

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

111 W

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

117 GY/L
119 P 120 L

EVAP canister vent control valve
Power supply for ECM

CONDITION
[Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] q More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON]

DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START

ABS00877

Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON. 2. Select "VENT CONTROL/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "ON/OFF" on CONSULT-II screen. 4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0151E

EC-340

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
EC

3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB1002E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E106, B2 q Harness connectors B108, B201 q Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R

PBIB0152E
I
J
K

>> Repair harness or connectors.

5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND

SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-341

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B201, B108 q Harness connectors B1, M12 q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. 3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 4. Turn ignition switch ON.

ABS00878

PBIB1033E

EC-342

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

5. Perform "VENT CONTROL/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.

6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.

Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

Condition VENT CONTROL/V

Air passage continuity between A and B

OFF

Yes

Operation takes less than 1 second.

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

If OK, go to next step.

PBIB0151E

7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

8. Perform step 6 again.

Without CONSULT-II

1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.

2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being

rusted.

3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

PBIB1033E
I
J

Condition

Air passage continuity between A and B

12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

OFF

Yes

Operation takes less than 1 second.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step.

L
PBIB1034E

4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

5. Perform step 3 again.

EC-343

DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

PFP:22365

Component Description

ABS00879

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.

PBIB1002E

PBIB1207E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

ABS0087A

MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES

q Ignition switch: ON

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS0087B

NOTE: If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-494 .

DTC No.
P0451 0451

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

EVAP control system pressure sensor performance

ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP control system pressure sensor

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors q EVAP control system pressure sensor

EC-344

DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0087C

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC
WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

2. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with

CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.

NOTE:

Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.

If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-345, "Diagnostic Procedure"

. E

SEF194Y

G
ABS0087D
H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

L
PBIB2192E
M

EC-345

DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
2. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.

2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-346, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram, refer to EC-349 .

PBIB1002E

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

ABS0087E

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.

2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.

Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Not applied
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)

Voltage V
1.8 - 4.8 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value

CAUTION: q Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
q Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

PBIB1173E

EC-346

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description

PFP:25085
A
ABS0087F

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the

ECM increases as pressure increases.

E
PBIB1002E
F

PBIB1207E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS0087G

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

EVAP SYS PRES q Ignition switch: ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic

Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V

K
ABS0087H

NOTE: If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to L
EC-494 .

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause
M

P0452 0452

EVAP control system pressure sensor low input

An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
q EVAP control system pressure sensor

EC-347

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0087I

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 5. Make sure that "FUEL T/TEMP SE" is more than 0°C (32°F). 6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
5. Select "MODE 7" with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF194Y PBIB1110E

EC-348

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram

ABS0087J
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-349

TBWT0662E

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

32 P

48 B/Y

67 B/W

ITEM
EVAP control system pressure sensor Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor)
Sensor ground

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON] [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V Approximately 5V Approximately 0V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS0087K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.

PBIB2192E

2. Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
EC-350

PBIB1002E

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor

terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Approximately 5V

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> GO TO 4.

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B201, B108 q Harness connectors B1, M12 q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

PBIB0138E
E
F
G

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND

SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal

67.

Refer to Wiring Diagram. K

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. q Harness connectors B201, B108 q Harness connectors B1, M12 q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-351

DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B201, B108 q Harness connectors B1, M12 q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

ABS0087L

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.

2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.

Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Not applied
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)

Voltage V
1.8 - 4.8 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value

PBIB1173E

EC-352

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description

PFP:25085
A
ABS0087M

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the

ECM increases as pressure increases.

E
PBIB1002E
F

PBIB1207E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS0087N

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

EVAP SYS PRES q Ignition switch: ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic

Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V

K
ABS0087O

NOTE: If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to L
EC-494 .

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause
M
q Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

P0453 0453

EVAP control system pressure sensor high input

An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

q EVAP control system pressure sensor q EVAP canister vent control valve q EVAP canister q Water separator

q Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control valve to water separator

EC-353

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0087P

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 5. Make sure that "FUEL T/TEMP SE" is more than 0°C (32°F). 6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. 7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-356, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

SEF194Y PBIB1110E

EC-354

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram

ABS0087Q
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-355

TBWT0662E

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

32 P

48 B/Y

67 B/W

ITEM
EVAP control system pressure sensor Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor)
Sensor ground

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON] [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V Approximately 5V Approximately 0V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS0087R

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.

PBIB2192E

2. Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
EC-356

PBIB1002E

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor

terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Approximately 5V

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB0138E
E
F
G

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND

SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal

67.

Refer to Wiring Diagram. K

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.

NG >> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. q Harness connectors B201, B108 q Harness connectors B1, M12 q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-357

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors B201, B108 q Harness connectors B1, M12 q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-360, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
12. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace water separator.
EC-358

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

13. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached.

2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 14.

No >> GO TO 16.

PBIB1031E

14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor F

attached.

The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15. H
15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q EVAP canister for damage

q EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

L >> INSPECTION END

EC-359

DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Component Inspection
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

ABS0087S

1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.

2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.

Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Not applied
-26.7 (-200, -7.87)

Voltage V
1.8 - 4.8 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value

PBIB1173E

EC-360

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic

PFP:14950
A
ABS0087T

This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

PBIB1026E

Possible cause

q Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to

close.

q Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve

q Incorrect fuel filler cap used

q Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.

q Leak is in line between intake manifold

and EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve.

q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister

vent control valve.

P0455 0455

q EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks

EVAP control system gross leak detected

EVAP control system has a very large leak

q EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)

such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control sys- leaks

tem does not operate properly.

q EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.

q Loose or disconnected rubber tube

q EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit

q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit

q Fuel tank temperature sensor

q O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged.

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

q Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve

q ORVR system leaks

EC-361

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

q Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0087U

CAUTION: Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE: q Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
q Perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface.
q Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6. Select "EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed.

PBIB0829E
NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
7. Make sure that "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" mode and make sure that "EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]" is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-363, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0442 is displayed, perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for DTC P0442 EC-323, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of EC-57, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to EC-57, "Driving Pattern" .
EC-362

SEC763C

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
3. Stop vehicle. 4. Select "MODE 1" with GST.
q If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step. q If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start engine. It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving. 7. Drive vehicle again according to EC-57, "Driving Pattern" . 8. Stop vehicle. 9. Select "MODE 3" with GST. q If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-363, "Diagnostic Procedure" . q If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-323 . q If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-318 . q If P0455, P0441, P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step. 10. Select "MODE 1" with GST. q If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK. q If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.

ABS0087V

2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-637, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
EC-363

K
SEF915U
L
M

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following. q EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-638, "Removal and Installation" . q EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
PBIB1001E

With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10.

EC-364

SEF916U

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" of "WORK SUPPORT" mode
with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "START" and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace.

A EC
C D E
PEF917U
F G H
SEF200U
I J K L M

EC-365

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

SEF200U

With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. 4. Touch "Qu" on CONSULT-II screen to increase "PURG VOL
CONT/V" opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13.

PBIB0828E

EC-366

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Stop engine.

3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.

4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.

5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.

Vacuum should exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13. E
13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .

OK or NG

OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15.

NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.

14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine.

2. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with

CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the

valve opening.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.
K

15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

L
PBIB0828E
M

EC-367

DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-641, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
19. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-645, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END
EC-368

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic

PFP:14950
A
ABS0087W

This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume

control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak EC diagnosis.

If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.

If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.

If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.

PBIB1026E

EC-369

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

DTC No.
P0456 0456

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve

q Incorrect fuel filler cap used

q Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.

q Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.

q Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve.

q EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks

q EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks

q EVAP purge line rubber tube bent

Evaporative emission control system very small leak (negative pressure check)

q EVAP system has a very small leak.
q EVAP system does not operate properly.

q Loose or disconnected rubber tube q EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit

q Fuel tank temperature sensor

q O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged

q Water separator

q EVAP canister is saturated with water

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

q Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve

q ORVR system leaks

q Fuel level sensor and the circuit

q Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0087X

NOTE: q If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456. q After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly. q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: q Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. q If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehi-
cle for more than 1 hour. Fuel filler cap is removed. Refilled or drained the fuel. EVAP component parts is/are removed. q Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

EC-370

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Make sure the following conditions are met.

FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V

COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)

FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)

INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)

If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the "FUEL LEVEL SE" meets within the range above and leave

the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Turn ignition switch ON.

5. Select "EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode

with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed.

PBIB0837E

6. Make sure that "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-372, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

NOTE:

q If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go

to EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .

q Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve properly.
Overall Function Check

K
ABS0087Y

WITH GST

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a L DTC might not be confirmed.

CAUTION:

q Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.

q Do not start engine.

q Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).

1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.

EC-371

PBIB1001E

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
2. Set the pressure pump and a hose. 3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Connect GST and select mode 8. 6. Using mode 8 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close). 7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied. Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg) Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg). If NG, go to EC-372, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to next step. 8. Disconnect GST. 9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 10. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds. 12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds. 13. Turn ignition switch OFF. NOTE: For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.

SEF462UI ABS0087Z

SEF915U

EC-372

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A

Refer to EC-637, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.

5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP

To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-

sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP

service port, refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE

DRAWING" .

F
PBIB1001E
G

SEF916U

NOTE:

Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.

With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.

Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.

EC-373

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" of "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "START" and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. NOTE: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace.

PEF917U SEF200U

EC-374

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts EC
until the end of test.)
C

PBIB1002E
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), F then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.

NOTE:

q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.

q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.

4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak

detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer

to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Repair or replace.

8. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace water separator.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following. q EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-638, "Removal and Installation" . q EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.

SEF200U

EC-375

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11. No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

PBIB1031E

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 12.
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. q EVAP canister for damage q EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. 4. Touch "Qu" on CONSULT-II screen to increase "PURG VOL
CONT/V" opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.

PBIB0147E

EC-376

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Stop engine.

3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.

4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.

5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.

Vacuum should exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15. E
15. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16.

NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.

16. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 17.

NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

17. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

J Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 18.

NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.

18. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR L

Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 19.

NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

19. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE

Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
20. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE

Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.

>> GO TO 21.

EC-377

DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM

21. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-641, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
22. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
23. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-644, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
24. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-15, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
25. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

ABS008GF

PBIB1032E

EC-378

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

PFP:25060
A
ABS00880
EC
C
D

On Board Diagnosis Logic

PBIB1011E
E
ABS00881

NOTE:

If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139 .

When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the

fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-

tion is detected.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0460 0460

q Harness or connectors

(The CAN communication line is open or

Fuel level sensor circuit noise

Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM.

shorted)
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

q Combination meter

DTC Confirmation Procedure

q Fuel level sensor

J
ABS00882

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at K least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-380, "Diagnostic Procedure"

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF195Y

EC-379

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" .
2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-13, "Inspection/Fuel Level Sensor" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

ABS00883 ABS00884

EC-380

DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

PFP:25060
A
ABS00885
EC
C
D

On Board Diagnosis Logic

PBIB1011E
E
ABS00886

NOTE:

If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139 .

Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.

This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has

been driven.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0461 0461

q Harness or connectors

(The CAN communication line is open or

The output signal of the fuel level sensor does shorted)

Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even

q Harness or connectors

range/performance

though the vehicle has been driven a long dis-

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

tance.

q Combination meter

Overall Function Check

q Fuel level sensor

J
ABS00887

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip

DTC might not be confirmed.

WARNING:

When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-11,

"FUEL TANK" .

TESTING CONDITION:

Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.

WITH CONSULT-II

NOTE: Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON. 6. Select "FUEL LEVEL SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

EC-381

DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

7. Check "FUEL LEVEL SE" output voltage and note it.
8. Select "FUEL PUMP" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULTII.
9. Touch "ON" and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 65/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
10. Check "FUEL LEVEL SE" output voltage and note it.
11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
12. Check "FUEL LEVEL SE" output voltage and note it.
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12. If NG, go to EC-382, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF195Y

WITH GST NOTE: Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. 6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. 7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 10. If NG, go to EC-382, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION

ABS00888

Refer to DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" .
2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT

Refer to DI-13, "Inspection/Fuel Level Sensor" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

ABS00889

EC-382

DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.

PFP:25060
A
ABS008EV
EC
C
D

On Board Diagnosis Logic

PBIB1011E
E
ABS008EW

NOTE:

If DTC P0462 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139 .

This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0462 0462

q Harness or connectors

(The CAN communication line is open or

shorted)

Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is q Harness or connectors

low input

sent to ECM.

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

q Combination meter

q Fuel level sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure
NOTE:

ABS008EX
J

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition

switch ON.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Wait at least 5 seconds.

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-384, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
EC-383

SEF195Y

DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" .
2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-13, "Inspection/Fuel Level Sensor" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

ABS008EY ABS008EZ

EC-384

DTC P0500 VSS

DTC P0500 VSS Description

PFP:32702
A
ABS008F0

NOTE:

If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC

U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the VDC/TCS/ABS control unit by CAN com-

munication line. The combination meter then sends the signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. C

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008F1

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

(The CAN communication line is open or

shorted)

P0500 0500

Vehicle speed sensor

The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven.

q Harness or connectors (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted)

q Wheel sensor

q Combination meter

DTC Confirmation Procedure

q VDC/TCS/ABS control unit

G
ABS008F2

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a

road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).

2. Read "VHCL SPEED SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT- K

II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.

If NG, go to EC-386, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

If OK, go to following step.

3. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.

5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-

onds.

ENG SPEED

1,600 - 6,000 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 70°C (158°F)

B/FUEL SCHDL

5.3 - 31.8 msec (A/T) 5.0 - 31.8 msec (M/T)

Selector lever

Except P or N position (A/T) Except Neutral position (M/T)

PW/ST SIGNAL

OFF

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-386, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF196Y

EC-385

DTC P0500 VSS

Overall Function Check

ABS008F3

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST 1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in "MODE 1" with GST. The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
4. If NG, go to EC-386, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK DTC WITH VDC/TCS ABS CONTROL UNIT

ABS008F4

Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace.
2. COMBINATION METER

Check combination meter function. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-386

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM Description

PFP:23781
A
ABS008F5

NOTE:

If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.

The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let

into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is

varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects

the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value

memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.

The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, D

such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan

operation, etc.).

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008F6

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0506 0506

Idle speed control system RPM lower than expected

The idle speed is less than the target idle speed by 100 rpm or more.

q Electric throttle control actuator q Intake air leak

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008F7

NOTE:

q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait

at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

q If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-42 ,

before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service

Data and Specifications (SDS), EC-652 .

TESTING CONDITION:

q Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

q Always perform the test at a temperature above -10°C (14°F).

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Open engine hood.

2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select "DATA MONITOR"

mode with CONSULT-II.

5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-388, "Diagnostic Procedure"

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF174Y

EC-387

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

ABS008F8

1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. REPLACE ECM

1. Stop engine. 2. Replace ECM. 3. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . 4. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 5. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 6. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-388

DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM

DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM Description

PFP:23781
A
ABS008F9

NOTE:

If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.

The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let

into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is

varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects

the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value

memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.

The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, D

such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan

operation, etc.).

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008FA

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0507 0507

Idle speed control system RPM higher than expected

The idle speed is more than the target idle speed by 200 rpm or more.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

q Electric throttle control actuator

q Intake air leak

q PCV system

G
ABS008FB

NOTE: q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait H
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
q If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-42 , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service I Data and Specifications (SDS), EC-652 .
TESTING CONDITION:
q Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. J q Always perform the test at a temperature above -10°C (14°F).

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Open engine hood.

2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select "DATA MONITOR"

mode with CONSULT-II.

5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-390, "Diagnostic Procedure"

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF174Y

EC-389

DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION

ABS008FC

Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
3. REPLACE ECM

>> INSPECTION END

EC-390

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.

PFP:49763
A
ABS008FD
EC
C
D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

PW/ST SIGNAL

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine

Steering wheel is in neutral position. (Forward direction)
Steering wheel is turned.

PBIB1281E
E
ABS008FE

SPECIFICATION

OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008FF

The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

NOTE:

If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to

EC-494 .

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0550

Power steering pres-

An excessively low or high voltage from the

q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

0550

sure sensor circuit

sensor is sent to ECM.

q Power steering pressure sensor

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008FG

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-393, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

EC-391

Wiring Diagram

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

ABS008FH

EC-392

TBWT0663E

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

0.5 - 4.5V

12 L/W

Power steering pressure sensor

q Steering wheel is being turned. [Engine is running]

q Steering wheel is not being turned.

0.4 - 0.8V

67 B/W

Sensor ground (Mass air flow sensor / IAT sensor / Power steering pressure sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V
E

68 Y

Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor / EVAP control system pressure sensor)

[Ignition switch ON]

Approximately 5V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS008FI

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

K
PBIB2192E
L
M

EC-393

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK PSP SENSOR
Refer to EC-395, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace PSP sensor.
EC-394

PBIB1281E PBIB0188E

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR

6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
following conditions.

Condition Steering wheel is being turned. Steering wheel is not being turned.

Voltage 0.5 - 4.5V 0.4 - 0.8V

EC
ABS008FJ
C

MBIB0126E

I J

K L

EC-395

DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM Component Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.

PFP:23710
ABS008FK

On Board Diagnosis Logic
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.

DTC No.
P0605 0605

Trouble diagnosis name A)
Engine control module B) C)

DTC detecting condition ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.

PBIB1164E ABS008FL
Possible cause q ECM

FAIL-SAFE MODE ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.

Detected items

Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

Malfunction A

q ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
q ECM deactivates ASCD operation.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008FM

Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.
EC-396

SEF058Y

DTC P0605 ECM
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON. 4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "SELF DIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "ERASE". 4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-396 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "MODE 4" with GST. 3. Touch "ERASE". 4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-396 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END
EC-397

A EC
C D
SEF058Y
E F G H I J
SEF058Y
K
ABS008FN
L M

DTC P0605 ECM
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. 2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 5. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-398

DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc.

PFP:23710
A
ABS008FO
EC
C

On Board Diagnosis Logic

PBIB1164E
E
ABS008FP

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

P1065 1065

ECM power supply cir- ECM back-up RAM system does not function

cuit

properly.

[ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is open or shorted.]

q ECM

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008FQ

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.

4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn

ON.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times.

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-401, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y
M

EC-399

Wiring Diagram

DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY

ABS008FR

EC-400

TBWT0664E

DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

121 R/W

Power supply for ECM (Back-up)

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

ABS008FS
D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E11, F2 q 15A fuse q Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

H
MBIB0026E
I J K L
M

EC-401

DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "SELF DIAG RESULTS" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch "ERASE". 4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-399 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
With GST 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "MODE 4" with GST. 3. Touch "ERASE". 4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-399 . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> INSPECTION END
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. 2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 5. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-402

DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Description
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position.

PFP:23796
A
ABS0088A
EC
C
D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

PBIB1842E
E
ABS0088B

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

q Engine: After warming up

Idle

0% - 2%

INT/V SOL (B1)

q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)

INT/V SOL (B2)

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly

Approx. 0% - 50%

q No-load

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS0088C

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P1111

1111

q Harness or connectors

(Bank 1) P1136

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit

An improper voltage is sent to the ECM through intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

(Intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)

1136

q Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

(Bank 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0088D

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and

wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-407, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Following the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
EC-403

SEF058Y

DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

ABS0088E

EC-404

TBWT0665E

DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
D

7 - 12V

11 R/W

Intake valve timing control

solenoid valve (bank 1)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm

quickly

PBIB1790E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

EC-405

BANK 2

DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

EC-406

TBWT0666E

DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
D

7 - 12V

10 W/G

Intake valve timing control

solenoid valve (bank 2)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm

quickly

PBIB1790E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.

G
ABS0088F
H
I

3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

PBIB0988E

PBIB0192E

EC-407

DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E12, F3 q Harness connectors F18, F201 q IPDM E/R harness connector E7 q Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 (bank 1) or 10 (bank 2) and intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F18, F201 q Harness for open and short between ECM and intake valve timing control solenoid valve
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-409, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-408

DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows.

Terminals 1 and 2
1 or 2 and ground

Resistance
7.0 - 7.5 at 20°C (68°F)
(Continuity should not exist)

Removal and Installation
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-56, "TIMING CHAIN" .

ABS0088G
A
EC
C
D
PBIB0193E
E
ABS0088H
F
G H
I J
K L
M

EC-409

DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

PFP:16119

Component Description

ABS0088I

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS0088J

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

P1121 1121

Electric throttle control

actuator

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction.
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range.

q Electric throttle control actuator

ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open.

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Malfunction A Malfunction B Malfunction C

ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0088K

NOTE: q Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
q If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T), and
wait at least 3 seconds. 4. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 7. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T), and
wait at least 3 seconds. 8. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). 9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON. 10. If DTC is detected, go to EC-411, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF058Y

With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

EC-410

DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T), and
wait at least 3 seconds. 4. Shift selector lever to N or P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/
T). 5. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. 6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-411, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Remove the intake air duct. 2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END

A EC
C D
SEF058Y
E F
ABS0088L
G H I J
PBIB1015E
K L M

EC-411

DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

PFP:16119

Description

ABS0088M

NOTE: If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or P1126. Refer to EC-410 or EC-418 . Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS0088N

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No.
P1122 1122

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not operperformance problem ate properly.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted)
q Electric throttle control actuator

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0088O

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-414, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-412

DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Wiring Diagram

ABS0088P
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-413

TBWT0667E

DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

3 W/R

Throttle control motor relay power supply

CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON]

DATA (DC Voltage)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

0 - 14V

4 BR

Throttle control motor (Close)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) q Accelerator pedal is released

Throttle control motor (Open)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) q Accelerator pedal is fully depressed

0 - 14V

PBIB1104E

104 G/W

Throttle control motor relay

[Ignition switch: OFF] [Ignition switch: ON]

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 1.0V
ABS0088Q

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
EC-414

PBIB2192E

DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.

Ignition switch OFF
ON
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 3.

Voltage
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8. 4. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following. q Harness connectors E12, F3 q Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6.

A EC
C D
MBIB0028E
E F G H I J K L M

PBIB1171E

EC-415

DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E9. 3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E11, F2 q Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK FUSE

1. Disconnect 15A fuse. 2. Check 15A fuse for blown. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace 15A fuse.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Electric throttle control actuator terminal

ECM terminal

Continuity

Should not exist

Should exist

Should not exist

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0995E

EC-416

DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Remove the intake air duct. 2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-417, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 14.
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
14. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step. 4. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 5. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

A EC
C D
PBIB1015E
E F G H I J K L
ABS0088R
M

Remove and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

PBIB0095E ABS0088S

EC-417

DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

PFP:16119

Component Description

ABS0088T

Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

ABS0088U

MONITOR ITEM THRTL RELAY

q Ignition switch: ON

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

ABS0088V

DTC No.
P1124 1124
P1126 1126

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Throttle control motor relay circuit short

ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is stuck ON.

Throttle control motor relay circuit open

ECM detects a voltage of power source for throttle control motor is excessively low.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted)
q Throttle control motor relay
q Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open)
q Throttle control motor relay

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0088W

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-421, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-418

SEF058Y

DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above. PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR""mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-421, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

A EC
C D E
SEF058Y
F G H I J K L M

EC-419

DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

Wiring Diagram

ABS0088X

EC-420

TBWT0668E

DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

3 W/R

Throttle control motor relay power supply

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

104 G/W

Throttle control motor relay

[Ignition switch: OFF] [Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

0 - 1.0V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

ABS0088Y
E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E9. 3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E11, F2 q Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

I
PBIB1171E
J
K
L
M

EC-421

DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

4. CHECK FUSE

1. Disconnect 15A fuse. 2. Check 15A fuse for blown. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace 15A fuse.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.

Ignition switch OFF
ON
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6.

Voltage
Approximately 0V
Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

Check the following. q Harness connectors E12, F3 q Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

MBIB0028E

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

EC-422

DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Component Description

PFP:16119
A
ABS0088Z

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed- EC back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS00890

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P1128 1128

Throttle control motor circuit short

ECM detects short in both circuits between ECM and throttle control motor.

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)

q Electric throttle control actuator

(Throttle control motor)

FAIL-SAFE MODE

When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return G
spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS00891

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.

4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-425, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

M
SEF058Y

EC-423

DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

Wiring Diagram

ABS00892

EC-424

TBWT0669E

DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C

0 - 14V

4 BR

Throttle control motor (Close)

[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T) q Accelerator pedal is released

D
E
PBIB1104E

0 - 14V
F
[Ignition switch: ON]

Throttle control motor (Open)

q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

q Accelerator pedal is fully depressed

PBIB1105E
H
ABS00893
I
J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

M
PBIB2192E

EC-425

DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

Electric throttle control actuator terminal

ECM terminal

Continuity

Should not exist

Should exist

Should not exist

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.

3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

PBIB0995E

Refer to EC-426, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step.
4. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 5. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

ABS00894

EC-426

PBIB0095E

DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

ABS00895
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-427

DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V.

PFP:22690
ABS00896
SEF463R

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 is monitored to determine whether the "rich" output is sufficiently high and whether the "lean" output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected.

SEF288D
ABS00897
SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V LEAN RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
ABS00898

SEF300U

DTC No.
P1143 1143 (Bank 1)
P1163 1163 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Heated oxygen sensor 1 lean shift monitoring

The maximum and minimum voltage from the sensor are not reached to the specified voltages.

EC-428

Possible cause
q Heated oxygen sensor 1 q Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater q Fuel pressure q Injector q Intake air leaks

DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

ABS0094P
A

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

q Always perform at a temperature above -10°C (14°F).

q Before performing following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "HO2S1 (B1) P1143" of "HO2S1" or "HO2S1 (B2) P1163" of "HO2S1" E in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Touch "START".

5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.

NOTE:

Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If

the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.

ENG SPEED Vehicle speed B/FUEL SCHDL Selector lever

1,200 - 2,600 rpm Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH) 2.5 - 12.0 msec Suitable position

If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-430, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

H
PBIB0546E
I
J
K
L
PBIB0547E
M

SEC769C

EC-429

DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1

Overall Function Check

ABS0094Q

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1(B2) signal] and
ground. 3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load. q The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. q The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time. 4. If NG, go to EC-430, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1107E ABS0089B

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1.

Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)

>> GO TO 3.

EC-430

PBIB2192E PBIB1284E

DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR". 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-254 . No >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-432, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For circuit, refer to EC-203, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-431

A EC
C D E
SEF968Y
F G H I J
PBIB1077E
K L M

DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1

Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

ABS0089C

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select "MANU TRIG" and adjust "TRIGGER POINT" to 100% in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULTII.

3. Select "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" and "HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)".

4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.

5. Touch "RECORD" on CONSULT-II screen.

SEF646Y SEF647Y

SEF648Y
CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
EC-432

DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and

ground.

3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-

stant under no load.

q The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V

more than 5 times within 10 seconds.

q The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

q The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

q The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

1 time: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 0.3V

E
PBIB1107E

CAUTION:

q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m

(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

G
ABS0089D

Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . H

EC-433

DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V.

PFP:22690
ABS0089E
SEF463R

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

HO2S1 (B1) HO2S1 (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

HO2S1 MNTR (B1) HO2S1 MNTR (B2)

q Engine: After warming up

Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

On Board Diagnosis Logic
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor 1 is monitored to determine whether the "rich" output is sufficiently high and "lean" output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected.

SEF288D
ABS0089F
SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V LEAN RICH Changes more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
ABS0089G

SEF299U

DTC No.
P1144 1144 (Bank 1)
P1164 1164 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Heated oxygen sensor 1 rich shift monitoring

The maximum and minimum voltages from the sensor are beyond the specified voltages.

q Heated oxygen sensor 1 q Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater q Fuel pressure q Injector

EC-434

DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1

DTC Confirmation Procedure
CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

ABS0094R
A

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

q Always perform at a temperature above -10°C (14°F).

q Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "HO2S1 (B1) P1144" or "HO2S1 (B2) P1164" of "HO2S1" in "DTC E WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Touch "START".

5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.

NOTE:

Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If

the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.

ENG SPEED Vehicle speed B/FUEL SCHDL Selector lever

1,200 - 2,600 rpm Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH) 2.5 - 12.0 msec Suitable position

If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-436, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

H
PBIB0548E
I
J
K
L
PBIB0549E
M

SEC772C

EC-435

DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1

Overall Function Check

ABS0094S

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] 16 [HO2S1(B2) signal] and ground. 3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load. q The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time. q The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time. 4. If NG, go to EC-436, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

PBIB1107E ABS0089J

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3.
EC-436

PBIB2192E PBIB1284E

DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR". 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-262 . No >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.

A EC
C D E
SEF968Y
F G H I J
PBIB1077E
K L M

3. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-437

PBIB1285E

DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1

5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-438, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For circuit, refer to EC-203, "Wiring Diagram" .

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

ABS0089K

With CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Select "MANU TRIG" and adjust "TRIGGER POINT" to 100% in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULTII.

3. Select "HO2S1 (B1)" and "HO2S1 MNTR (B1)".

4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.

5. Touch "RECORD" on CONSULT-II screen.

6. Check the following. q "HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)" in "DATA MONITOR" mode changes from "RICH" to "LEAN" to "RICH" 5 times in 10 seconds. 5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right. q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage goes above 0.6V at least once. q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
EC-438

SEF646Y SEF647Y

DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1

CAUTION:

SEF648Y
D

q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m

(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor E

Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and

ground.

3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-

stant under no load.

q The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more than 5 times within 10 seconds.

q The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.

q The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.

q The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.

1 time: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 - 0.3V 0.6 - 1.0V 0 0.3V

J
PBIB1107E

CAUTION:

q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m

(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor

Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation

L
ABS0089L

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

EC-439

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.

PFP:226A0
ABS0089M

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

SEF327R ABS0089N

MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2)

CONDITION

q Warm-up condition

q After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly.

SPECIFICATION 0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 1.0V
LEAN RICH

On Board Diagnosis Logic
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

ABS0089O

SEF972Z

DTC No.
P1146 1146 (Bank 1)
P1166 1166 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Heated oxygen sensor 2 minimum voltage monitoring

The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
q Heated oxygen sensor 2 q Fuel pressure q Injector

EC-440

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0089P

NOTE:

If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC
WITH CONSULT-II

TESTING CONDITION:

For better results, perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with

CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-

ture.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and

4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

6. Make sure that "COOLAN TEMP/S" indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when "COOLAN TEMP/S" indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.

F
SEF174Y
G

8. Select "HO2S2 (B1) P1146" or "HO2S2 (B2) P1166" of "HO2S2" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. H
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.

10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If "CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED" is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.

PBIB0818E
L
M

Overall Function Check

ABS0089Q

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

EC-441

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB1607E

EC-442

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

ABS0089R
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-443

TBWT0651E

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

74 L/B

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)

[Engine is running]
q Warm-up condition
q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met.
After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V

EC-444

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
BANK 2
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-445

TBWT0652E

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

55 R/Y

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are met. After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

0 - Approximately 1.0V Approximately 0V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS0089S

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2192E

EC-446

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode
with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR". 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-262 . No >> GO TO 3.

E
SEF968Y
F

G H

PBIB1077E

EC-447

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC
P1146 P1166

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank
1 2

Continuity should exist.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC
P1146 P1166

Terminals

ECM

Sensor

Bank
1 2

Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB1284E

EC-448

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-449, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.

A
EC
C
D
ABS0089T
E
F
G
H
SEF174Y
I
J
K
L
SEF662Y
M

DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground.

7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this procedure.

PBIB1607E

8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

CAUTION: q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

ABS0089U

EC-450

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.

PFP:226A0
A
ABS0089V
EC
C
D

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

SEF327R
E
ABS0089W

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

HO2S2 (B1)

q Warm-up condition

0 - 0.3V Approx. 0.6 -

HO2S2 (B2)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2)

q After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly.

1.0V LEAN RICH

On Board Diagnosis Logic

H
ABS0089X

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer

switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor

2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is suf-

ficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.

PBIB0820E
L

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P1147 1147

q Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

(Bank 1)
P1167 1167

Heated oxygen sensor 2 maximum voltage monitoring

The maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage.

q Heated oxygen sensor 2 q Fuel pressure q Injector

(Bank 2)

q Intake air leaks

EC-451

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0089Y

NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform "DTC WORK SUPPORT" at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).

1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

6. Make sure that "COOLAN TEMP/S" indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when "COOLAN
TEMP/S" indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).

SEF174Y

7. Open engine hood.

8. Select "HO2S2 (B1) P1147" or "HO2S2 (B2) P1167" of "HO2S2" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II.

9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.

10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC-457, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If "CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED" is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.

PBIB0819E

Overall Function Check

ABS0089Z

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

EC-452

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T). The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-457, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

A EC
C
PBIB1607E
D E F G H I J K L M

EC-453

Wiring Diagram
BANK 1

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

ABS008A0

EC-454

TBWT0651E

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

74 L/B

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)

quickly after the following conditions are met.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V
F

EC-455

BANK 2

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

EC-456

TBWT0652E

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm

55 R/Y

Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2)

quickly after the following conditions are met.

0 - Approximately 1.0V

After keeping the engine speed between

3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load.

78 B/Y

Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V
F

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS008A1
G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

K
PBIB2192E
L
M

EC-457

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Select "SELF-LEARNING CONT" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode
with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching "CLEAR". 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-254 . No >> GO TO 3.

SEF968Y PBIB1077E

EC-458

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.

4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

PBIB1284E
F

Continuity should exist.

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC

Terminals

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P1147

P1167

Continuity should exist.

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

DTC

Terminals

Bank

ECM

Sensor

P1147

P1167

Continuity should not exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-459

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-460, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.

ABS008A2 SEF174Y

7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%.

SEF662Y

DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread

Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.

4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and

ground.

6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times.

(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)

The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this

procedure.

If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-

sary.

PBIB1607E

8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

CAUTION:

q Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7

in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

q Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread

Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.

Removal and Installation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .

ABS008A3
J

EC-461

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

PFP:22690
ABS008A4

DTC No.
P1148 1148 (Bank 1)
P1168 1168 (Bank 2)

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Closed loop control function

The closed loop control function for bank 1 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition.
The closed loop control function for bank 2 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition.

Possible cause
q The heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.
q Heated oxygen sensor 1 q Heated oxygen sensor heater

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS0094T

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION:
q Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, retry the procedure from step 2.
q Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm and check one of the following.
q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage should go above 0.70V at least once.
q "HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)" voltage should go below 0.21V at least once. If the check result is NG, perform EC-463, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, perform the following step.
4. Let engine idle at least 5 minutes.
5. Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive seconds.

SEC011C

B/FUEL SCHDL ENG SPEED Selector lever VHCL SPEED SE

2.5 msec or more More than 1,500 rpm Suitable position More than 70 km/h (43 MPH)

During this test, P0132 and/or P0152 may be displayed on CONSULT-II screen. 6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-463, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

EC-462

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL

Overall Function Check

ABS0094U

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop control. During this check, a DTC might not A

be confirmed.

WITH GST

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1)

signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and ground.

3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-

stant under no-load.

q The voltage should go above 0.70V at least once.

q The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once.

4. If NG, go to EC-463, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

Diagnostic Procedure
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0133, P0153. Refer to EC-217, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB1107E
F
ABS0094V
G

EC-463

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT

PFP:47850

Description

ABS008A8

The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from VDC/ TCS/ABS control unit to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for VDC/TCS/ABS control unit but also for ECM after TCS related repair.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008A9

Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this selfdiagnosis.

DTC No.
P1211 1211

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

TCS control unit

ECM receives a malfunction information from VDC/TCS/ABS control unit.

Possible cause q VDC/TCS/ABS control unit q TCS related parts

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008AA

TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds. 4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-464, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
Go to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .

SEF058Y ABS008AB

EC-464

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE Description

PFP:47850
A
ABS008AC

NOTE: If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and VDC/TCS/ABS control unit. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for VDC/TCS/ABS control unit but C also for ECM after TCS related repair.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008AD

Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-

diagnosis.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connectors

P1212 1212

TCS communication line

ECM can not receive the information from VDC/TCS/ABS control unit continuously.

(The CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
q VDC/TCS/ABS control unit

DTC Confirmation Procedure

q Dead (Weak) battery

G
ABS008AE

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.

4. If a 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-465, "Diagnostic Proce-

dure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT FUNCTION
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END

L
SEF058Y
M
ABS008AF

EC-465

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)

PFP:00000

Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

ABS0094E

NOTE: If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000 or U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

Cooling Fan Control

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*1

Battery Wheel sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor

Battery voltage*1 Vehicle speed*2 Engine coolant temperature

Cooling fan control

Air conditioner switch

Air conditioner ON signal*2

Refrigerant pressure sensor

Refrigerant pressure

*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.

Actuator
IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays)

The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [High/Low/Off].

Cooling Fan Operation

EC-466

PBIB1036E

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)

Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.

Stop

Cooling fan speed

Cooling fan relay

OFF

Low High

OFF

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Cooling Fan Motor

The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.

Cooling fan motor terminals

Cooling fan speed

(+)

(-)

Low

1 or 2

3 and 4

High

1 and 2

3 and 4

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS0094F

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

G
SPECIFICATION

Air conditioner switch: OFF

OFF

AIR COND SIG

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine

Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.)

Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less

OFF

q Engine: After warming up, idle

Engine coolant temperature is

COOLING FAN

the engine

between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C

LOW

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

(210°F)

Engine coolant temperature is 100°C (212°F) or more

On Board Diagnosis Logic

K
ABS0094G

If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will

rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is

indicated.

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P1217 1217

Engine over temperature (Overheat)

q Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat).
q Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat).
q Engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method.
q Engine coolant is not within the specified range.

q Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
q Cooling fan q Radiator hose q Radiator q Radiator cap q Water pump q Thermostat q Cooling fan (crankshaft driven)

For more information, refer to EC-477, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .

EC-467

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)

CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-10, "Changing Engine Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-10, "Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.

Overall Function Check

ABS0094H

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Start engine. Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates normally. If NG, refer to CO-22, "COOLING FAN" . If OK, go to the following step.
5. Stop engine and turn ignition switch ON.
6. Select "COOLING FAN" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
7. If the results are NG, go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF621W

WITH GST 1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Start engine. Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates normally. If NG, refer to CO-22, "COOLING FAN" .
EC-468

SEF646X SEF621W

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)

If OK, go to the following step.

5. Turn air condition switch ON.

6. Turn blower fan switch ON.

7. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.

If NG, go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

If OK, go to the following step.

8. Turn ignition switch OFF.

9. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.

10. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor. D

11. Connect 150 resister to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
12. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed. Be careful not to overheat engine.
13. If NG, go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

PBIB2214E

H
SEF882V
I

EC-469

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)

Wiring Diagram

ABS0094I

EC-470

TBWT0672E

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-471

TBWT0673E

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK COOLING FAN (CRANKSHAFT DRIVEN)
1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates normally. OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. NG >> Check cooling fan (crankshaft driven). Refer to CO-22, "COOLING FAN" .
2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "COOLING FAN" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch "LOW" on the CONSULT-II screen. 3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
475, "PROCEDURE A" .)

ABS0094J

3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II 1. Touch "HIGH" on the CONSULT-II screen. 2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low
speed. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
476, "PROCEDURE B" .)

SEF784Z

SEF785Z

EC-472

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)

4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION A

Without CONSULT-II

1. Start engine and let it idle. EC
2. Turn air conditioner switch ON.

3. Turn blower fan switch ON.

4. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-

475, "PROCEDURE A" .)

5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. 3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 4. Connect 150 resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
476, "PROCEDURE B" .)

PBIB2214E

G H

6. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 3. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 3,
4 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.

SEF882V

PBIB1004E

EC-473

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E54, E55 q Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. Pressure should not drop. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Check the following for leak
q Hose q Radiator q Water pump
Refer to CO-26, "WATER PUMP" .
9. CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief pressure: 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace radiator cap.

SLC754A

10. CHECK THERMOSTAT

1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. It should seat tightly.
2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.

Valve opening temperature: Valve lift:

82°C (180°F) [standard]
More than 8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)

3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to CO-32, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace thermostat.

EC-474

SLC755A SLC949A

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)

11. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-185, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
12. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-477, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E6. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 16 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q 40A fusible link q Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E5 and E9. 3. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 8, cooling fan motor terminal 3 and ground, cooling fan motor terminal 4 and ground, IPDM E/R terminal 54 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

A EC
C D E F G H I
PBIB0966E
J K L M
PBIB1004E

EC-475

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E55, E54 q Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and cooling fan motor q Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ground q Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR

Refer to EC-477, "COOLING FAN MOTOR" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. 3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E6 and E9. 4. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 11, IPDM E/R terminal 54 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR

PBIB1004E

Refer to EC-477, "COOLING FAN MOTOR" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness connectors.

EC-476

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)

Main 12 Causes of Overheating

Engine Step

Inspection item

Equipment

Standard

ABS0094K
A
Reference page

OFF

q Blocked radiator

q Visual

No blocking

q Blocked condenser

q Blocked radiator grille

q Blocked bumper

q Coolant mixture

q Coolant tester

50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-10

q Coolant level

q Visual

Coolant up to MAX level CO-10

in reservoir tank and radi-

ator filler neck

q Radiator cap

q Pressure tester

59 - 98 kPa

CO-16

(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14

psi) (Limit)

ON*2

q Coolant leaks

q Visual

No leaks

CO-10

ON*2

q Thermostat

q Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-32

lower radiator hoses

ON*1 OFF

q Cooling fan

q CONSULT-II

Operating

q Combustion gas leak q Color checker chemical Negative

tester 4 Gas analyzer

See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-466 ).

ON*3

q Coolant temperature q Visual

gauge

Gauge less than 3/4 when driving

--
H

q Coolant overflow to

q Visual

No overflow during driving CO-10

reservoir tank

and idling

OFF*4

q Coolant return from

q Visual

Should be initial level in CO-10

reservoir tank to radia-

reservoir tank

tor

OFF

q Cylinder head

q Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-92

gauge

mum distortion (warping)

q Cylinder block and pis- q Visual

No scuffing on cylinder EM-110

tons

walls or piston

*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.

*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.

*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.

*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.

For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .

Component Inspection
COOLING FAN MOTOR 1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

ABS0094L

Speed

Cooling fan motor

Low High

(+) 1 or 2 1 and 2

Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor.

terminals

(-) 3 and 4 3 and 4

SEF734W

EC-477

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)

PFP:00000

Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

ABS008AG

NOTE: If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .

Cooling Fan Control

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*1

Battery Wheel sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor

Battery voltage*1 Vehicle speed*2 Engine coolant temperature

Cooling fan control

Air conditioner switch

Air conditioner ON signal*2

Refrigerant pressure sensor

Refrigerant pressure

*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.

Actuator
IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays)

Cooling Fan Operation

EC-478

PBIB1103E

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)

Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.

Cooling fan speed Stop

1 OFF

Cooling fan relay 2
OFF

OFF

Low High

OFF

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Cooling Fan Motor

The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.

Cooling fan motor terminals

Cooling fan speed

(+)

(-)

Low

High

1 and 2

3 and 4

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

ABS008AH

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

Air conditioner switch: OFF

OFF

AIR COND SIG

q Engine: After warming up, idle the engine

Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor operates.)

Engine coolant temperature is 94°C (201°F) or less

OFF

q Engine: After warming up, idle

Engine coolant temperature is

COOLING FAN

the engine

between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C

LOW

q Air conditioner switch: OFF

(210°F)

Engine coolant temperature is 100°C (212°F) or more

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008AI

If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will L

rise.

When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is

indicated.

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No.
P1217 1217

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Engine over temperature (Overheat)

q Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
q Cooling fan q Radiator hose q Radiator q Radiator cap q Water pump q Thermostat For more information, refer to EC-489, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .

EC-479

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)

Overall Function Check

ABS008AJ

SEF621W

4. Perform "COOLING FAN" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-484, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST 1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-484, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-484, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 3. Start engine. Be careful not to overheat engine. 4. Turn air conditioner switch ON. 5. Turn blower fan switch ON.
EC-480

SEF646X SEF621W

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)

6. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed. If NG, go to EC-484, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to the following step.
7. Turn ignition switch OFF. 8. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF. 9. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor. 10. Connect 150 resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
11. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed. Be careful not to overheat engine.
12. If NG, go to EC-484, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

A
EC
C
SEC163BA
D
E

G
MEC475B
H

EC-481

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS) Wiring Diagram

ABS008AK

EC-482

TBWT0670E

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-483

TBWT0671E

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Select "COOLING FAN" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch "LOW" on the CONSULT-II screen. 3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
487, "PROCEDURE A" .)

ABS008AL

3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II 1. Touch "HIGH" on the CONSULT-II screen. 2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed
than low speed. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
488, "PROCEDURE B" .)

SEF784Z

4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Turn air conditioner switch ON. 3. Turn blower fan switch ON. 4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
487, "PROCEDURE A" .)

SEF785Z

EC-484

SEC163BA

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)

5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION A

Without CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.

3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.

4. Connect 150 resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.

5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 oper-

ate at higher speed than low speed.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-

488, "PROCEDURE B" .)

6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. Pressure should not drop. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-10, "LEAK
CHECK" . q Hose q Radiator q Water pump
7. CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief pressure: 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace radiator cap.

F
MEC475B
G
H
I
J
SLC754A
K
L
M

SLC755A

EC-485

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)

8. CHECK THERMOSTAT

1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. It should seat tightly.
2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.

Valve opening temperature: Valve lift:

76.5°C (170°F) [standard]
More than 8.6 mm/90°C (0.339 in/194°F)

3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to CO-32, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace thermostat

9. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-185, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
10. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-489, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .

SLC949A

>> INSPECTION END

EC-486

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)

PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E6. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals 15, 16 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q 40A fusible links q Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E5. 3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminal
2 and IPDM E/R terminal 11, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-2 terminal
2 and IPDM E/R terminal 10, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist. 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Refer to EC-489, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.

A EC
C D E
PBIB1924E
F G H I J K L
PBIB1283E
M

EC-487

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)

5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling
fan motor-2 harness connector. 3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E5 and E6. 4. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 8, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminal 9, IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. 6. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 13, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminal 12, IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist.
7. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS

PBIB1283E

Refer to EC-489, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness connectors.

EC-488

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)

Main 12 Causes of Overheating

Engine Step

Inspection item

Equipment

Standard

ABS008AM
A
Reference page

OFF

q Blocked radiator

q Visual

No blocking

q Blocked condenser

q Blocked radiator grille

q Blocked bumper

q Coolant mixture

q Coolant tester

50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-10

q Coolant level

q Visual

Coolant up to MAX level CO-10

in reservoir tank and radi-

ator filler neck

q Radiator cap

q Pressure tester

59 - 98 kPa

CO-16

(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14

psi) (Limit)

ON*2

q Coolant leaks

q Visual

No leaks

CO-10

ON*2

q Thermostat

q Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-32

lower radiator hoses

ON*1 OFF

q Cooling fan

q CONSULT-II

Operating

q Combustion gas leak q Color checker chemical Negative

tester 4 Gas analyzer

See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-478 ).

ON*3

q Coolant temperature q Visual

gauge

Gauge less than 3/4 when driving

--
H

q Coolant overflow to

q Visual

No overflow during driving CO-10

reservoir tank

and idling

OFF*4

q Coolant return from

q Visual

Should be initial level in CO-10

reservoir tank to radia-

reservoir tank

tor

OFF

q Cylinder head

q Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-92

gauge

mum distortion (warping)

q Cylinder block and pis- q Visual

No scuffing on cylinder EM-110

tons

walls or piston

*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.

*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.

*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.

*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.

For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .

Component Inspection
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2 1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

ABS008AN

Speed

Cooling fan motor

Low High

(+) 1 2 1 and 2

terminals

(-) 3 4 3 and 4

Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor.

SEF734W

EC-489

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

PFP:16119
ABS008AO
PBIB0145E ABS008AP

DTC No.
P1225 1225

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Closed throttle position learning performance problem

Closed throttle position learning value is exces- q Electric throttle control actuator

sively low.

(TP sensor 1 and 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008AQ

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-491, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-490

DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the intake air duct. 3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

ABS008AR
A
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1015E
F
G H
ABS008AS
I J
K L
M

EC-491

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

PFP:16119
ABS008AT
PBIB0145E ABS008AU

DTC No.
P1226 1226

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Closed throttle position learning performance problem

Closed throttle position learning is not performed successfully, repeatedly.

Possible cause
q Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008AV

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times. 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-493, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.

WITH GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-492

DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the intake air duct. 3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

ABS008AW
A
EC
C
D
E
PBIB1015E
F
G H
ABS008AX
I J
K L
M

EC-493

DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY On Board Diagnosis Logic
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

PFP:16119
ABS008AY

DTC No.
P1229 1229

Trouble diagnosis name
Sensor power supply circuit short

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

ECM detects a voltage of power source for sensor is excessively low or high.

q Harness or connectors (APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.) (PSP sensor circuit is shorted.) (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.) (EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
q Accelerator pedal position sensor
q Power steering pressure sensor
q Refrigerant pressure sensor
q EVAP control system pressure sensor

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008AZ

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-496, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-494

Wiring Diagram

DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

ABS008B0
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-495

TBWB0074E

DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

TERMINAL
NO. 48
49
68
90

WIRE COLOR B/Y
W/L
Y BR/Y

ITEM
Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor)
Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor)
Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor)
Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON]

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V Approximately 5V Approximately 5V Approximately 5V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS008B1

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

PBIB2192E

EC-496

DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3.

D
PBIB0996E
E
F
G

3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between following terminals.

PBIB0914E

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3

Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1

PSP sensor terminal 1

APP sensor terminal 6

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK COMPONENTS

Check the following. q EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-352 .) q Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-395 .) q Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-90 .) OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR

Reference Wiring Diagram

EC-349

EC-392

EC-608
K
EC-556

Refer to EC-559, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-497

DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END
EC-498

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
PFP:14920 A

Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM function

ABS008B2
EC
Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed *1

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Battery Throttle position sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor
Heated oxygen sensor 1

Battery voltage*1 Throttle position Accelerator pedal position Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal)

EVAP canister

EVAP canister purge vol-

purge flow control ume control solenoid valve

Fuel tank temperature sensor

Fuel temperature in fuel tank

Wheel sensor*2

Vehicle speed

*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-

sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP

canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the H

ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is

determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor

from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/

OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-

ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is

moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,

the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

PURG VOL C/V

q Engine: After warming up q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

Idle 2,000 rpm

L
SEF337U
M
ABS008B3
SPECIFICATION 0%
--

EC-499

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008B4

DTC No.
P1444 1444

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

The canister purge flow is detected during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed.

q EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve is stuck open.)
q EVAP canister vent control valve
q EVAP canister
q Hoses (Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008B5

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select "PURG VOL CN/V P1444" of "EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM" in "DTC WORK SUPPORT" mode with
CONSULT-II. 5. Touch "START".

PBIB0839E
6. Start engine and let it idle until "TESTING" on CONSULT-II changes to "COMPLETED". (It will take approximately 10 seconds.) If "TESTING" is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that "OK" is displayed after touching "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". If "NG" is displayed, refer to EC503, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. 4. Select "MODE 7" with GST. 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-503, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-500

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram

ABS008B6
A

EC-501

TBWT0660E

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

[Engine is running] q Idle speed

45 L/Y

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
[Engine is running] q Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine).

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

SEC990C

111 W
119 P 120 L

ECM relay (Self shut-off)
Power supply for ECM

[Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] q For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF] q More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
[Ignition switch: ON]

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

0 - 1.5V

SEC991C

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

EC-502

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure

ABS008B7

1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-

CUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2.

E
PBIB1001E
F
G
H

I
PBIB0148E

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

J Check the following.

q Harness connectors E12, F3

q IPDM E/R harness connector E7

q Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R

q Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM

>> Repair harness or connectors.

3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-

CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-503

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 3. Start engine. 4. Perform "PURG VOL CONT/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.

7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-506, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-504

PBIB0147E

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached.

2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 11.

No >> GO TO 13.

PBIB1031E

11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor F

attached.

The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12. H
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q EVAP canister for damage

q EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

13. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Clean or replace water separator.

14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-505

DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value)
100%
0%

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

ABS008B8

Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

Condition
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No supply

Air passage continuity between A and B
Yes
No

Removal and Installation
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

PBIB0149E
PBIB0150E ABS008B9

EC-506

DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP Control System diagnosis.

PFP:14935
A
ABS008BA
EC
C
D
SEF381Z
E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V

q Ignition switch: ON

CONDITION

On Board Diagnosis Logic

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P1446 1446

EVAP canister vent con- EVAP canister vent control valve remains

trol valve close

closed under specified driving conditions.

PBIB1002E

ABS008BB

SPECIFICATION

OFF

Possible cause

ABS008BC
K

q EVAP canister vent control valve

q EVAP control system pressure sensor

and the circuit

q Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister

vent control valve

q Water separator

q EVAP canister is saturated with water

EC-507

DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008BD

NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.

2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.

5. Repeat next procedures 3 times.

a. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. Never exceed 3 minutes.

b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds.

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-510, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.

SEF058Y

7. Repeat next procedure 20 times.

a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.

b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.

8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-510, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST
Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

PBIB0972E

EC-508

DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Wiring Diagram

ABS008BE
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-509

TBWT0661E

DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

111 W

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

117 GY/L
119 P 120 L

EVAP canister vent control valve
Power supply for ECM

DATA (DC Voltage)
0 - 1.5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE

ABS008BF

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.

3. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
2. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Clean or replace water separator.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-512, "EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
EC-510

PBIB1002E

DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

4. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached.

2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 5.

No >> GO TO 7.

PBIB1031E

5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor F

attached.

The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. H
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q EVAP canister for damage

q EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection

J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.

7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check connectors for water.
L Water should not exist.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-511

DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. 3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 4. Turn ignition switch ON.

ABS008BG

PBIB1033E

5. Perform "VENT CONTROL/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

Condition VENT CONTROL/V

Air passage continuity between A and B

OFF

Yes

Operation takes less than 1 second.

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step.

PBIB0151E

7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

8. Perform step 6 again.

Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted.

PBIB1033E

3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.

Condition

Air passage continuity between A and B

12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

OFF

Yes

Operation takes less than 1 second.

If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step.

PBIB1034E

4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.

EC-512

DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
5. Perform step 3 again. A
EC C D E F G H I J K L M
EC-513

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to EC-649, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

PFP:25551
ABS008BH

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

PBIB1006E ABS008BI

MONITOR ITEM

MAIN SW

q Ignition switch: ON

CANCEL SW

q Ignition switch: ON

RESUME/ACC SW q Ignition switch: ON

SET SW

q Ignition switch: ON

CONDITION ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Released CANCEL switch: Pressed CANCEL switch: Released ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed ACCEL/RESUME switch: Released COAST/SET switch: Pressed COAST/SET switch: Released

SPECIFICATION ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008BJ

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE: If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-396.

DTC No.

Trouble Diagnosis Name

P1564 1564

ASCD steering switch

DTC Detecting Condition

Possible Cause

q An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM.
q ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steering switch is out of the specified range.
q ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck ON.

q Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
q ASCD steering switch q ECM

EC-514

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008BK

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

EC
WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Wait at least 10 seconds.

4. Press ON/OFF (MAIN) switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.

5. Press ACCEL/RESUME switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.

6. Press COAST/SET switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.

7. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.

8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-517, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST

Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

EC-515

Wiring Diagram

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

ABS008BL

EC-516

TBWT0675E

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

67 B/W

Sensor ground

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

C
Approximately 0V

q Idle speed

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 4V

q ASCD steering switch: OFF

[Ignition switch: ON]

q ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed.

Approximately 0V

[Ignition switch: ON]

99 G/Y

ASCD steering switch

Approximately 1V

q CANCEL switch: Pressed.

[Ignition switch: ON] q COAST/SET switch: Pressed.

Approximately 2V

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 3V

q ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed.

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS008BM

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.

L
PBIB2192E
M

EC-517

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "MAIN SW", "RESUME/ACC SW", "SET SW" and "CANCEL SW" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with
CONSULT-II. 3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.

Switch
ON/OFF (MAIN) switch

Monitor item MAIN SW

COAST/SET switch SET SW

ACCEL/RESUME switch

RESUME/ACC SW

CANCEL switch

CANCEL SW

Condition Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released

Indication ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

SEC006D

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button.

Switch

Condition

Voltage [V]

ON/OFF (MAIN) switch

Pressed Released

Approx. 0 Approx. 4

COAST/SET switch

Pressed Released

Approx. 2 Approx. 4

ACCEL/RESUME switch

Pressed Released

Approx. 3 Approx. 4

CANCEL switch

Pressed Released

Approx. 1 Approx. 4

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M203. 4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal
15 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB0311E PBIB1006E

EC-518

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Combination switch (spiral cable) q Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Combination switch (spiral cable) q Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Refer to EC-519, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace steering wheel.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).
2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch.

Switch ON/OFF (MAIN) switch COAST/SET switch ACCEL/RESUME switch

Condition Pressed Released Pressed Released Pressed Released

Resistance [] Approx. 0
Approx. 4,000 Approx. 660 Approx. 4,000 Approx. 1,480 Approx. 4,000

EC-519

A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M
ABS008BN
PBIB0967E

Switch CANCEL switch

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Condition Pressed Released

Resistance [] Approx. 250 Approx. 4,000

EC-520

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-649, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

PFP:25320
A
ABS008BO
EC
C

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

PBIB1282E
E
ABS008BP

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

q Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake

pedal: Fully released

BRAKE SW 1 (ASCD brake switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

q Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or

brake pedal: Slightly

OFF

depressed

BRAKE SW 2 (stop lamp switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

q Brake pedal: Fully released q Brake pedal: Depressed

OFF ON

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008BQ

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

NOTE:

If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to

EC-396

DTC No.

Trouble Diagnosis Name

DTC Detecting Condition

Possible Cause

q Harness or connectors

(The stop lamp switch circuit is open or

shorted.)

q Harness or connectors

(The ASCD brake switch circuit is open or shorted.)

P1572 1572

ASCD brake switch

When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (19 q Stop lamp switch

MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch

and the ASCD brake switch are sent to the

q ASCD brake switch

ECM at the same time.

q Incorrect stop lamp switch installation

q Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation

q ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)

q Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation (M/T models)

q ECM

EC-521

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008BR

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.

VHCL SPEED SE Selector lever

More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Suitable position

If DTC is detected, go to EC-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC is not detected, go to the following step.

4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)

Selector lever

Suitable position

Driving location

Depress the brake pedal for more than five seconds so as not to come off from the above-mentioned condition.

5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

EC-522

Wiring Diagram
A/T MODELS

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

ABS0094W
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-523

TBWT0677E

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

101 P/L

Stop lamp switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is depressed

Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

108 SB

ASCD brake switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is depressed [Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is fully released

Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

EC-524

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
M/T MODELS
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-525

TBWT0676E

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

101 P/L

Stop lamp switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is depressed

Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

108 SB

ASCD brake switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are
depressed
[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully
released

Approximately 0V
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

EC-526

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Diagnostic Procedure
A/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "BRAKE SW1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check "BRAKE SW1" indication under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is fully released

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is fully released

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.

ABS008BT
A
EC
C
D
E
F
SEC011D
G H
I J
K
MBIB0061E
L
M

EC-527

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II Check "BRAKE SW2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

SEC013D

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 8.

MBIB0060E

EC-528

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-529

A EC
C D
PBIB1005E
E F G H
PBIB0857E
I J K L M

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection" OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.

PBIB1005E

9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.

PBIB1804E

EC-530

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E108, M15

q Harness connectors M72, F102

q Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH D

Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection"

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 13.

NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.

13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-531

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

M/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "BRAKE SW1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check "BRAKE SW1" indication under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.

SEC011D MBIB0061E

EC-532

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II Check "BRAKE SW2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 11.

3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.

CONDITION
When brake pedal is released
When brake pedal is depressed
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 4.

VOLTAGE Battery voltage Approximately 0V

EC-533

SEC013D

G H

MBIB0060E

M
PBIB1282E

PBIB0799E

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB1282E

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse

PBIB0857E

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection" OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.

EC-534

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
8. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 108.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
11. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12.

A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M
PBIB1282E

PBIB1804E

EC-535

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14.
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E108, M15 q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection" OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-536

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed.

Continuity Should exist. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.

Condition When clutch pedal is fully released. When clutch pedal is depressed.

Continuity Should exist. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5, "CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed.

Continuity Should not exist.
Should exist.

If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

ABS008BU
A EC
C D E
SEC023D
F G H I
SEC024D
J K L M
PBIB1805E

EC-537

DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

PFP:31036

Component Description

ABS008BV

The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-649, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008BW

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE: q If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
q If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer to EC-385, "DTC P0500 VSS"
q If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-396, "DTC P0605 ECM"

DTC No.

Trouble Diagnosis Name

DTC Detecting Condition

Possible Cause

P1574 1574

ASCD vehicle speed sensor

ECM detects a difference between two vehicle speed signals is out of the specified range.

q Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
q Combination meter q VDC/TCS/ABS control unit q Wheel sensor q TCM q ECM

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008BX

CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH). 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-539, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.
EC-538

SEF058Y

DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-38 . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2. CHECK DTC WITH VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter function. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END

ABS008BY
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-539

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Component Description
When the gear position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.

PFP:32006
ABS008BZ

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS008C0

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

P/N POSI SW

q Ignition switch: ON

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON

Shift lever: Except above

OFF

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008C1

DTC No.
P1706 1706

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Park/neutral position switch

The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and driving.

Possible cause
q Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.]
q Park/neutral position (PNP) switch q Combination meter (A/T models)

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008C2

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select "P/N POSI SW" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the "P/N POSI SW" signal under the following conditions.

Position (Selector lever)
P or N position (A/T) Neutral position (M/T)
Except the above position

Known-good signal ON OFF

If NG, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step.
3. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.

SEF212Y

ENG SPEED

1,400 - 6375 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 70°C (158°F)

B/FUEL SCHDL

2.0 - 31.8 msec

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)

Selector lever

Suitable position

6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

SEF213Y

EC-540

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

Overall Function Check

ABS008C3

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this A

check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

WITH GST

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)

and ground under the following conditions.

Condition (Gear position)

Voltage V (Known good data)

P or N position (A/T) Neutral position (M/T)

Approx. 0

Except the above position

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

3. If NG, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

MBIB0043E
F

EC-541

Wiring Diagram
A/T MODELS

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

ABS0094X

EC-542

TBWT0679E

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

102 G/OR PNP switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Shift lever: P or N

C
Approximately 0V

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Except the above gear position

(11 - 14V)

EC-543

M/T MODELS

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

EC-544

TBWT0678E

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

102 G/OR PNP switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Shift lever: Neutral

Approximately 0V

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Except the above gear position

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
A/T MODELS
1. INSPECTION START

ABS008C5
E

Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "A/T", then "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Select "P/N POSI SW" signal and check its indication under the
following conditions.

Condition (Gear position)
P or N position
Other position
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

P/N POSI SW ON OFF

3. CHECK PNP SWITCH SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II Confirm that the PNP switch signal is sent to TCM correctly. Refer to AT-112, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

F G H I J K L
PBIB0102E
M

Check the PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-112, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-545

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect TCM harness connector. 3. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between TCM terminal 48 and combination meter terminal 15.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7 NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F102, M72 q Harness for open or short between TCM and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Check harness continuity between combination meter terminal 45 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 12.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F102, M72 q Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-546

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH

10. CHECK COMBINATION METER A

Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11.

NG >> Replace combination meter

11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

D >> INSPECTION END

M/T MODELS

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3 NG >> GO TO 2.

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors F102, M72

q Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground

K >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4. CHECK PNP SWITCH

Refer to MT-12, "POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace PNP switch.

EC-547

DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END
EC-548

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Description

PFP:25320
A
ABS008C6

Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.

This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS008C7

Specification data are reference values.
MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

C
SPECIFICATION

Brake pedal: Fully released

OFF

BRAKE SW

q Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

On Board Diagnosis Logic
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

ABS008C8
E

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P1805 1805

Brake switch

q Harness or connectors

A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or

extremely long time while the vehicle is driving. shorted.)

q Stop lamp switch
G

FAIL-SAFE MODE

When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.

Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.

Therefore, acceleration will be poor.

Vehicle condition

Driving condition

When engine is idling When accelerating

Normal

Poor acceleration

DTC Confirmation Procedure
WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
4. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-551, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

ABS008C9
K
L
M

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-549

Wiring Diagram

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

ABS008CA

EC-550

TBWT0680E

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

101 P/L

Stop lamp switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is depressed

Approximately 0V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

ABS008CB
E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.

Brake pedal

Stop lamp

Fully released

Not illuminated

Depressed

Illuminated

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 4.

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

L
PBIB1282E
M

PBIB1804E

EC-551

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q 10A fuse q Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 q Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop
lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E108, M15 q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-553, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

PBIB1282E

EC-552

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

Component Inspection
STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed.

Continuity Should not exist.
Should exist.

If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

ABS008CC
A EC
C D E
PBIB1805E
F G H I J K L M

EC-553

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

PFP:18002

Component Description

ABS008CD

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-

tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal

position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.

In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of

the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The

ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from

these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these

signals.

Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM

PBIB1741E

receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-

ation such as fuel cut.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS008CE

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

ACCEL SEN1

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 4.0 - 4.7V

ACCEL SEN2*

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.3 - 1.2V 3.9 - 4.8V

CLSD THL POS

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF

*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008CF

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
NOTE: If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-494 .

DTC No.
P2122 2122
P2123 2123

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low input
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high input

An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)

An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- q Accelerator pedal position sensor

sor 1 is sent to ECM.

(APP sensor 1)

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor.

EC-554

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008CG

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.

4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

F
SEF058Y
G
H

EC-555

Wiring Diagram

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

ABS008CH

EC-556

TBWT0417E

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

82 GY/L

Sensor ground (APP sensor 1)

83 B/R 90 BR/Y

Sensor ground (APP sensor 2)
Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]

C
Approximately 0V
D
Approximately 0V
E
Approximately 5V

91 G

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

0.15 - 0.60V

98 LG/B

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

q Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

1.95 - 2.40V

q Accelerator pedal fully depressed

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

0.5 - 1.0V

106 BR

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

q Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

3.9 - 4.7V

q Accelerator pedal fully depressed

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS008CI

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
EC-557

PBIB2192E

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0996E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 82.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0914E

EC-558

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-559, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.
9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.

Terminal
106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)

Accelerator pedal Fully released Fully depressed Fully released Fully depressed

Voltage 0.5 - 1.0V 3.9 - 4.7V 0.15 - 0.60V 1.95 - 2.40V

EC-559

A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M
ABS008CJ
MBIB0023E

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 6. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 7. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

ABS008CK

EC-560

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Component Description

PFP:18002
A
ABS008CL

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-

tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal

position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.

In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of

the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The

ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from

these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these

signals.

Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM

PBIB1741E

receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-

ation such as fuel cut.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

ABS008CM

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

ACCEL SEN1

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 4.0 - 4.7V

ACCEL SEN2*

q Ignition switch: ON

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

0.3 - 1.2V

(Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

3.9 - 4.8V

CLSD THL POS

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF

*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008CN

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P2127 2127

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low input

An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.

q Harness or connectors (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)

(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)

P2128 2128

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high input

An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.

q Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2)
q Electric throttle control actuator

(TP sensor 1 and 2)

EC-561

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008CO

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-564, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "With CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-562

Wiring Diagram

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

ABS008CP
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-563

TBWB0075E

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

47 B

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

82 GY/L

Sensor ground (APP sensor 1)

83 B/R 90 BR/Y 91 G

Sensor ground (APP sensor 2)
Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

98 LG/B

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

106 BR

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

CONDITION
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed [Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON]
[Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Engine stopped q Accelerator pedal fully depressed

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V Approximately 0V Approximately 0V Approximately 5V Approximately 5V 0.15 - 0.60V 1.95 - 2.40V 0.5 - 1.0V 3.9 - 4.7V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS008CQ

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
EC-564

PBIB2192E

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3.

D
PBIB0996E
E
F
G

3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair or replace open circuit.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

APP sensor terminal 4

EC-563

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1

EC-570

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0915E

EC-565

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-574, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 7.
7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 83.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-566

DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR

12. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-567, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13.
13. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Terminal

Accelerator pedal

Voltage

106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)

Fully released Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 3.9 - 4.7V

98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)

Fully released Fully depressed

0.15 - 0.60V 1.95 - 2.40V

4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 6. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 7. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

Removal and Installation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

A EC
C D E F G
ABS008CR
H I J K L
MBIB0023E
M
ABS008CS

EC-567

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

PFP:16119

Component Description

ABS008CT

PBIB0145E

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS008CU

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

THRTL SEN1 THRTL SEN2*

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008CV

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P2135 2135

Throttle position sensor circuit range/performance problem

Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and TP sensor 2.

Possible cause
q Harness or connector (TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
q Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2)
q Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2)

FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor.

EC-568

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008CW

NOTE:

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.

WITH CONSULT-II

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.

4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

F
SEF058Y
G
H

EC-569

Wiring Diagram

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

ABS008CX

EC-570

TBWB0076E

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

47 B

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Approximately 5V

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

More than 0.36V

q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

q Accelerator pedal fully released

50 W

Throttle position sensor 1

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

Less than 4.75V

q Accelerator pedal fully depressed

66 W/R

Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor)

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition q Idle speed

Approximately 0V
G

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped

Less than 4.75V

q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

q Accelerator pedal fully released

69 R/L

Throttle position sensor 2

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Engine stopped q Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)

More than 0.36V

q Accelerator pedal fully depressed

91 G

Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

[Ignition switch: ON]

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

Approximately 5V

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

K
ABS008CY
L

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
EC-571

PBIB2192E

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON.

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB0995E

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

PBIB0082E

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1

EC-570

APP sensor terminal 4

EC-563

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-567, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-572

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY A

1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.

2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

C >> INSPECTION END

7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist. F
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM

terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 9.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-574, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11.

NG >> GO TO 10.

10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-573

DTC P2135 TP SENSOR

Component Inspection
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D (A/T), 1st (M/T) position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions.

Terminal

Accelerator pedal

Voltage

50 (Throttle position sensor 1)

Fully released Fully depressed

More than 0.36V Less than 4.75V

69 (Throttle position sensor 2)

Fully released Fully depressed

Less than 4.75V More than 0.36V

6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step.
7. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

Removal and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .

ABS008CZ
PBIB1170E ABS008D0

EC-574

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Component Description

PFP:18002
A
ABS008D1

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-

tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.

Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal

position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.

In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of

the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The

ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from

these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these

signals.

Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM

PBIB1741E

receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-

ation such as fuel cut.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.

ABS008D2

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

ACCEL SEN1

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 4.0 - 4.7V

ACCEL SEN2*

q Ignition switch: ON

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

0.3 - 1.2V

(Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

3.9 - 4.8V

CLSD THL POS

q Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF

*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.

On Board Diagnosis Logic

ABS008D3

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
NOTE: If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to K EC-494.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

q Harness or connector

(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or

P2138 2138

Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit range/performance problem

Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2.

shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
q Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1 and 2)

q Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2)

EC-575

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

DTC Confirmation Procedure

ABS008D4

WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. 4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-578, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

WITH GST Follow the procedure "WITH CONSULT-II" above.

SEF058Y

EC-576

Wiring Diagram

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

ABS008D5
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-577

TBWB0077E

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

47 B

Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor)

82 GY/L

Sensor ground (APP sensor 1)

83 B/R 90 BR/Y 91 G

Sensor ground (APP sensor 2)
Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2)

98 LG/B

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

106 BR

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V Approximately 0V Approximately 0V Approximately 5V Approximately 5V 0.15 - 0.60V 1.95 - 2.40V 0.5 - 1.0V 3.9 - 4.7V

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS

ABS008D6

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .

OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
EC-578

PBIB2192E

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 5.

D
PBIB0996E
E

PBIB0914E

I J

K L

PBIB0915E

EC-579

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair or replace open circuit.
7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.

ECM terminal

Sensor terminal

Reference Wiring Diagram

APP sensor terminal 4

EC-577

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1

EC-570

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-574, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 9.
9. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. 2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-580

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

10. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 83, APP sensor terminal 3 EC
and ECM terminal 82. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.

11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E10, F1

q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5, ECM terminal 98 and

APP sensor terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 14.

NG >> GO TO 13.

13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E10, F1

q Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

14. CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-582, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15.

EC-581

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR

15. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" 3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" 4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning"

>> INSPECTION END
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

Terminal

Accelerator pedal

Voltage

106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)

Fully released Fully depressed

0.5 - 1.0V 3.9 - 4.7V

98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)

Fully released Fully depressed

0.15 - 0.60V 1.95 - 2.40V

Removal and Installation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .

ABS008D7
MBIB0023E ABS008D8

EC-582

IGNITION SIGNAL

IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

PFP:22448
A
ABS008D9

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil

secondary circuit.

E
PBIB1007E
F

EC-583

Wiring Diagram

IGNITION SIGNAL

ABS008DA

EC-584

TBWT0682E

IGNITION SIGNAL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

111 W

ECM relay (Self shut-off)

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

[Engine is running]

[Ignition switch: OFF]

0 - 1.5V

q For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q More than a few seconds after turning igni- (11 - 14V)

tion switch OFF

119 P 120 L

Power supply for ECM

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
F

EC-585

IGNITION SIGNAL

EC-586

TBWT0462E

IGNITION SIGNAL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION [Engine is running]

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
0 - 0.2V

q Warm-up condition
D
q Idle speed

60 PU/W 61 L/R 62 Y/R

Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1

NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
0.1 - 0.4V

E
SEC986C
F

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

SEC987C
H

EC-587

IGNITION SIGNAL

EC-588

TBWT0463E

IGNITION SIGNAL

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

79 GY/R 80 GY 81 G/R

Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition
q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

0 - 0.2V

0.1 - 0.4V

SEC986C

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
G

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. Is engine running? Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II 1. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop. OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10.

SEC987C
H
ABS008DB
I
J
K
L
M

PBIB0133E

EC-589

IGNITION SIGNAL
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II 1. Let engine idle. 2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79,
80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope. 3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below. NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10.

SEC986C

4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Go to EC-130, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .

PBIB1186E MBIB0034E

EC-590

IGNITION SIGNAL
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E7. 3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E12, F3 q Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

A EC
C D
PBIB1286E
E F G H
PBIB0624E
I J K L M

EC-591

IGNITION SIGNAL
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-594, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace condenser.
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.

4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F18, F201 q Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F3
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
EC-592

PBIB1007E PBIB0138E

IGNITION SIGNAL

12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 14.

NG >> GO TO 13.

13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors F18, F201

q Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ground F

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist. I
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16.

NG >> GO TO 15.

15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors F18, F201

q Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

16. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Refer to EC-594, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. refer to PG-16 . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

EC-593

IGNITION SIGNAL

Component Inspection
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.

Terminal No. (Polarity) 1 and 2 1 and 3 2 and 3

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Except 0 or
Except 0

CONDENSER 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.

Resistance

Above 1 M at 25°C (77°F)

Removal and Installation
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EM-35, "IGNITION COIL" .

ABS008DC
PBIB0847E
PBIB0794E ABS008DD

EC-594

INJECTOR CIRCUIT
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Component Description
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

B/FUEL SCHDL

q Engine: After warming up q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

Idle 2,000 rpm

INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2

q Engine: After warming up q Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) q Air conditioner switch: OFF q No-load

Idle 2,000 rpm

PFP:16600
A
ABS008DE
EC

D
SEF375Z
E
ABS008DF

SPECIFICATION

2.5 - 3.5 msec

2.0 - 3.0 msec

1.9 - 2.9 msec
I

EC-595

Wiring Diagram

INJECTOR CIRCUIT

ABS008DG

EC-596

TBWT0301E

INJECTOR CIRCUIT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE

[Engine is running]

(11 - 14V)

q Warm-up condition

q Idle speed

NOTE:

The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at

idle.

21 G 22 R/Y 23 R/B

Injector No. 5 Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1

SEC984C

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

[Engine is running]

q Warm-up condition

q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

40 P 41 R/L 42 R/W

Injector No. 6 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2

SEC985C

[Engine is running]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

q Warm-up condition

q Idle speed
NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.

SEC984C

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
L

q Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

SEC985C

EC-597

INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure
1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with
CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3.

ABS008DH PBIB0133E PBIB1986E

EC-598

INJECTOR CIRCUIT

3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect injector harness connector.

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB0997E
E
F
G

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness connectors F33, F221 q Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between injector and fuse

H
PBIB0582E
I
J
K

>> Repair harness or connectors.

5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.

EC-599

INJECTOR CIRCUIT
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors F33, F221 q Harness for open or short between injector and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK INJECTOR
Refer to EC-600, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace injector.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INJECTOR 1. Disconnect injector harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5 [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]

ABS008DI

Removal and Installation
INJECTOR
Refer to EM-38, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .

PBIB1727E ABS008DJ

EC-600

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PFP:17042
A
ABS008DK

Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

ECM Function

Actuator

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*

Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay

Battery

Battery voltage*

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that

the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the

ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,

thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump E

relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Engine running and cranking When engine is stopped Except as shown above

Condition

Fuel pump operation

Operates for 1 second.

Operates.

Stops in 1.5 seconds.

Stops.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

FUEL PUMP RLY

q For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON q Engine running or cranking

q Except above conditions

K
PBIB1011E

ABS008DL
L

SPECIFICATION

OFF

EC-601

Wiring Diagram

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

ABS008DM

EC-602

TBWT0683E

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

[Ignition switch: ON]

q For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V

113 B/OR Fuel pump relay
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: ON] q More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON.

BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

D
E
ABS008DN

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.

Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose

for 1 second after ignition switch is turned "ON".

OK or NG

OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 113 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3.

I
PBIB1020E
J
K
L
M

PBIB1187E

EC-603

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 13.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E11, F2 q Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 3. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK 15A FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect 15A fuse. 3. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace fuse.
EC-604

PBIB1926E PBIB0624E

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8.

2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and condenser terminal 1.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 13.

NG >> GO TO 8.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E106, B2

q Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser F

>> Repair harness or connectors.

9. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 10.

NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

10. CHECK CONDENSER

Refer to EC-606, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 11.

NG >> Replace condenser.

11. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" harness connector.

3. Check harness continuity between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminal 1 and harness connector B2 terminal 18, "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

PBIB0994E

EC-605

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
12. CHECK FUEL PUMP
Refer to EC-606, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Component Inspection
FUEL PUMP 1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector. 2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0 [at 25°C (77°F)]

CONDENSER 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.

Resistance

Above 1 M at 25°C (77°F)

ABS008DO SEC918C

Removal and Installation
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .

PBIB0794E ABS008DP

EC-606

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.

PFP:92136
A
ABS008DQ
EC
C
D
PBIB1009E
E
F
G
H
SEF099XA
I
J
K
L
M

EC-607

Wiring Diagram

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

ABS008DR

EC-608

TBWT0684E

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

49 W/L

Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor)

[Ignition switch: ON]

C
Approximately 5V

67 B/W

Sensor ground

[Engine is running] q Warm-up condition

D
Approximately 0V

q Idle speed

[Engine is running]

70 R/B

q Warm-up condition Refrigerant pressure sensor

1.0 - 4.0V

q Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON.

(Compressor operates.)

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

ABS008DS
G

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON-

SULT-II or tester.

Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V

OK or NG

OK >> INSPECTION END

NG >> GO TO 2.

K
PBIB1188E
L

EC-609

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF. 2. Stop engine. 3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. 4. Turn ignition switch ON.

5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3.

PBIB1009E

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E11, F2 q Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

PBIB0188E

>> Repair harness or connectors.
4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E11, F2 q Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-610

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 8.

NG >> GO TO 7.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E11, F2

q Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .

F G H
ABS008DT
I

EC-611

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL

PFP:25350

Description

ABS008DU

The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS008DV

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

LOAD SIGNAL

q Ignition switch: ON

CONDITION
Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF and lighting switch is OFF.

SPECIFICATION ON OFF

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

ABS008DW

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode.
3. Select "LOAD SIGNAL" and check indication under the following conditions.

Condition
Rear window defogger switch ON
Rear window defogger switch OFF
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.

Indication ON OFF

2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

PBIB0103E

Check "LOAD SIGNAL" indication under the following conditions.

Condition
Lighting switch ON at 2nd position
Lighting switch OFF
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4.

Indication ON OFF

3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to GW-94, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .

PBIB0103E

>> INSPECTION END
4. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-7, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-39, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-612

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-649, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

Specification data are reference values.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

BRAKE SW 1 (ASCD brake switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

q Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal: Fully released
q Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal: Slightly depressed

BRAKE SW 2 (stop lamp switch)

q Ignition switch: ON

q Brake pedal: Fully released q Brake pedal: Depressed

PFP:25320
A
ABS008DX
EC

D
PBIB1282E
E
ABS008DY

SPECIFICATION

ON
G
OFF

OFF

EC-613

Wiring Diagram
A/T MODELS

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

ABS0094Y

EC-614

TBWT0686E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA (DC Voltage)

101 P/L

Stop lamp switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is depressed

C
Approximately 0V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

108 SB

ASCD brake switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is depressed [Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is fully released

Approximately 0V
E
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
F

EC-615

M/T MODELS

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

EC-616

TBWT0685E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.

CAUTION:

Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.

TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

EC
DATA (DC Voltage)

101 P/L

Stop lamp switch

[Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is fully released [Ignition switch: ON] q Brake pedal is depressed

Approximately 0V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch: ON]

q Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are

Approximately 0V

depressed

108 SB

ASCD brake switch

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE

q Brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released

(11 - 14V)

EC-617

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Diagnostic Procedure
A/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "BRAKE SW1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check "BRAKE SW1" indication under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is fully released

INDICATION OFF ON

ABS008E0

Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is fully released

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

SEC011D

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.

MBIB0061E

EC-618

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II Check "BRAKE SW2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8.

SEC013D

G H

I
MBIB0060E
J

EC-619

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4.

PBIB1005E

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-620

PBIB0857E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection" OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 q 10A fuse q Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11.

PBIB1005E

I
J
PBIB1804E
K
L

EC-621

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E108, M15 q Harness connectors M72, F102 q Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection" OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END
EC-622

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

M/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "BRAKE SW1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check "BRAKE SW1" indication under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.

A EC
C D E
SEC011D
F G H I J
MBIB0061E
K L M

EC-623

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-II Check "BRAKE SW2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed

INDICATION OFF ON

Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION When brake pedal is released When brake pedal is depressed

VOLTAGE Approximately 0V
Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11.

3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.

CONDITION
When brake pedal is released
When brake pedal is depressed
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 4.

VOLTAGE Battery voltage Approximately 0V

EC-624

SEC013D MBIB0060E PBIB1282E PBIB0799E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.

3. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5.

PBIB1282E
E
F
G

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

PBIB0857E
I

Check the following.

q Fuse block (J/B) connector E101

q 10A fuse

q Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.

EC-625

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
8. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 108.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. q Harness connectors E10, F1 q Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
11. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12.
EC-626

PBIB1282E PBIB1804E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.

q Fuse block (J/B) connector E101

q 10A fuse

q Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse

C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.

Refer to Wiring Diagram.

Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 15.

NG >> GO TO 14.

14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.

q Harness connectors E108, M15

q Harness connectors M72, F102

q Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection"

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 16.

NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.

16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END

EC-627

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed.

Continuity Should exist. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

Condition When clutch pedal is fully released. When clutch pedal is depressed.

Continuity Should exist. Should not exist.

If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5, "CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.

Condition When brake pedal is fully released. When brake pedal is depressed.

Continuity Should not exist.
Should exist.

If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.

ABS008E1 SEC023D SEC024D PBIB1805E

EC-628

ASCD INDICATOR

ASCD INDICATOR Component Description

PFP:24814
A
ABS008E2

ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and

SET, and is integrated in combination meter.

CRUISE indicator illuminates when ON/OFF (MAIN) switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated

that ASCD system is ready for operation.

SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.

q CRUISE indicator is illuminated.

q SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD set-

ting.

SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.

Refer to EC-649, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode

ABS008E3

Specification data are reference value.

MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION ON/OFF (MAIN) switch:

SPECIFICATION
F

CRUISE LAMP

q Ignition switch: ON

Pressed at the 1st time at ON OFF

the 2nd time

q ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: ON COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON

SET LAMP

q When vehicle speed is

between 40 km/h (25 MPH) COAST/SET switch: Released OFF

and 144 km/h (89MPH)

EC-629

Wiring Diagram

ASCD INDICATOR

ABS008E4

EC-630

TBWT0305E

ASCD INDICATOR

Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

ABS008E5
A

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.

ASCD INDICATOR

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

ON/OFF (MAIN) switch:

CRUISE LAMP

q Ignition switch: ON

Pressed at the 1st time at ON OFF

the 2nd time

q ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: ON COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON

SET LAMP

q When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) COAST/SET switch: Released OFF

and 144 km/h (89MPH)

OK or NG

OK >> INSPECTION END

NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK DTC

Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.

NG >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN

COMMUNICATION LINE" .

3. CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION

Does combination meter operate normally?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 4.

No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .

4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .

>> INSPECTION END L

EC-631

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR Wiring Diagram

PFP:24814
ABS008E6

EC-632

TBWT0439E

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-633

TBWT0687E

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PFP:14950
ABS008E7

PBIB1685E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling.

EC-634

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-635

PBIB1022E

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

EC-636

PBIB1023E

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Block port B . 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C . 3. Release blocked port B . 4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports A and C . 5. Block port A and B . 6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP) 1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: -6.0 to -3.3 kPa (-0.061 to -0.034 kg/cm2 , -0.87 to -0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-335 . FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-278 . EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-342 . EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-352 .

ABS008E8
A

D
PBIB1044E
E

G
H
SEF445Y
I
J

SEF943S

EC-637

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAP SERVICE PORT Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak.
Removal and Installation
EVAP CANISTER Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.

SEF462UA ABS008E9

EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.

PBIB1029E

How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage
CAUTION: q Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. q Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. NOTE: q Do not start engine. q Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.

PBIB1030E ABS008EA

EC-638

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
WITH CONSULT-II 1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. 2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select the "EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE" of "WORK SUPPORT
MODE" with CONSULT-II. 5. Touch "START". A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port. 2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
EC-639

E
PEF838U
F

G H

PEF917U

L
SEF200U
M

SEF462UA

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
3. Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system.
PBIB1002E
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
5. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. 6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
EC-640

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) System Description

PFP:00032
A
ABS008EB
EC

PBIB1028E

From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut

valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is

released to the atmosphere.

When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and

refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged

during driving.

WARNING:

When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:

q Put a "CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE" sign in workshop.

q Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.

q Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.

CAUTION: q Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:

Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.

Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .

Disconnect battery ground cable.

q Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.

q Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.

q Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.

q After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.

q Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

EC-641

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

Diagnostic Procedure
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

ABS008EC

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 6.

3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

PBIB1031E

>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-644, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace water separator.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.

>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
6. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-644, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.

EC-642

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG

WHILE REFUELING.

1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC attached.

2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor

attached.

The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 2.

NG >> GO TO 3.

2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?

Yes or No

Yes >> GO TO 3.

No >> GO TO 6.

3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

PBIB1031E
I

Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

J >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR

Refer to EC-644, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.

NG >> Replace water separator.

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.

>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
6. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.

EC-643

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
7. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE
Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace filler neck tube.
8. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-644, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
9. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
11. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. 2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. 3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
Component Inspection
WATER SEPARATOR 1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet. 2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. 3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.

SEF665U ABS008ED

EC-644

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with

A , and then C plugged.

5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.

NOTE:

Do not disassemble water separator.

REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

PBIB1032E
D

With CONSULT-II

1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-11, "FUEL TANK" .

2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:

a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.

b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other F side to a fuel container.

c. Drain fuel using "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.

3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.

Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that

the air flows freely into the tank.

4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.

a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.

b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.

Always replace O-ring with new one.

c. Put fuel tank upside down.

d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer

remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.

Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-11, "FUEL TANK" . 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel gauge retainer. b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
EC-645

PBIB1035E

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
PBIB1035E
EC-646

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PFP:11810
A
ABS008EE
EC

SEC921C

This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake H

manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the

PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-

lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold I

vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection

in the reverse direction.

On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not

meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go

through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-

tions.

Component Inspection
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.

PBIB1588E

ABS008EF

EC-647

PBIB1589E

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277
EC-648

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

PFP:18930
A
ABS008EG

Sensor ASCD brake switch

Input signal to ECM Brake pedal operation

ECM function

Actuator

Stop lamp switch

Brake pedal operation

ASCD clutch switch

Clutch pedal operation

ASCD steering switch
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch

ASCD steering switch operation ASCD vehicle speed control Gear position

Electric throttle control actuator

Combination meter*

Vehicle speed

TCM*

Powertrain revolution

*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed

without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/

h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).

ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.

Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any

malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.

NOTE:

Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.

SET OPERATION

Press ON/OFF (MAIN) switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)

When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89

MPH), press COAST/SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)

ACCEL OPERATION

If the ACCEL/RESUME switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the

switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.

And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.

CANCEL OPERATION
L When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
q CANCEL switch is depressed
q More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared) M q Brake pedal is depressed
q Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models)
q Selector lever is changed to N, R, P position (A/T models)
q Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
q VDC/TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
q Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may blink slowly. When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing COAST/SET switch or ACCEL/ RESUME switch.
q Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If ON/OFF (MAIN) switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle speed memory will be erased.

EC-649

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
COAST OPERATION When the COAST/SET switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. RESUME OPERATION When the ACCEL/RESUME switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing ON/OFF (MAIN) switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions. q Brake pedal is released q Clutch pedal is released (M/T models) q A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models) q Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
EC-650

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Component Description
ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to EC-514 . ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-521 , and EC-613 . ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH Refer to EC-521 . STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-521 , EC-549 and EC-613 . ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EC-410 , EC-412 , EC-418 and EC-423 . ASCD INDICATOR Refer to EC-629 .

ABS008EH
A EC
C D E F G H I J K L M

EC-651

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure

PFP:00030
ABS008EI

Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)

Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)

Idle Speed and Ignition Timing

ABS0094Z

Target idle speed

A/T No-load* (in P or N position) M/T No-load* (in Neutral position)

Air conditioner: ON

A/T In P or N position M/T In Neutral position

Ignition timing

A/T In P or N position M/T In Neutral position

*: Under the following conditions: q Air conditioner switch: OFF q Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) q Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position

Calculated Load Value

650±50 rpm 775 rpm or more 15° ± 5° BTDC
ABS008EK

At idle At 2,500 rpm

Conditions

Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST) 5 - 35 5 - 35

Mass Air Flow Sensor

ABS008EL

Supply voltage

Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

Output voltage at idle

0.9 - 1.2*V

Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST)

2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle* 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*

*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.

Intake Air Temperature Sensor

ABS008EM

25 (77) 80 (176)

Temperature °C (°F)

Resistance k 1.94 - 2.06
0.295 - 0.349

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

ABS008EN

20 (68) 50 (122) 90 (194)

Temperature °C (°F)

Resistance k 2.1 - 2.9
0.68 - 1.00 0.236 - 0.260

Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater

ABS008EO

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater

3.3 - 4.0

ABS008EP

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)
Refer to EC-302, "Component Inspection" .
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
Refer to EC-310, "Component Inspection" .
EC-652

5.0 - 7.0

ABS008EQ ABS008ER

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Throttle Control Motor
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Injector
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
Fuel Pump
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

Approximately 1 - 15 13.5 - 17.5
Approximately 0.2 - 5.0

ABS008ES
A
ABS008ET
EC
ABS008EU
C
D
E
F
G H
I J
K L
M

EC-653

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) EC-654

Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows FrameMaker SGML 5.5.6p145J